Circuit Card Description and Installation

ManualsBrandsNortel Networks ManualsComputer HardwareCircuit Card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5

Circuit Card

Description and Installation

Document Number: 553-3001-211

Document Release: Standard 3.00

Date: August 2005

Year Publish FCC TM

Produced in Canada

Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design

or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant.

Nortel, Nortel (Logo), the Globemark, This is the Way, This is Nortel (Design mark), SL-1, Meridian 1, and

Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.

Title page

Summary of content (908 pages)

PAGE 1
Title page Nortel Communication Server 1000 Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5 Circuit Card Description and Installation Document Number: 553-3001-211 Document Release: Standard 3.00 Date: August 2005 Year Publish FCC TM Copyright © Nortel Networks Limited 2005 All Rights Reserved Produced in Canada Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant.
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
4 Page 3 of 906 Revision history August 2005 Standard 3.00. This document is up-issued to support Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5. September 2004 Standard 2.00. This document is up-issued for Communication Server 1000 Release 4.0. October 2003 Standard 1.00. This document is a new NTP for Succession 3.0. It was created to support a restructuring of the Documentation Library, which resulted in the merging of multiple legacy NTPs.
PAGE 4
Page 4 of 906 553-3001-211 Revision history Standard 3.
PAGE 5
18 Page 5 of 906 Contents LIst of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Subject .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Applicable systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Conventions .. .
PAGE 6
Page 6 of 906 Contents Acceptance tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Conference cards .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Digitone receiver cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 7
Contents Page 7 of 906 QPC414 Network card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 QPC441 3-Port Extender cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 QPC471 Clock Controller card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 8
Page 8 of 906 Contents Front panel connector pin assignments .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 9
Contents Page 9 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Physical description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 10
Page 10 of 906 Contents NT6D80 MSDL card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Functional description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 11
Contents Page 11 of 906 Upgrading systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards . . . . . . . . 527 Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Physical description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 12
Page 12 of 906 Contents Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 13
Contents Page 13 of 906 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 NTAG26 XMFR card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 14
Page 14 of 906 Contents NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Introduction .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Functional description .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 15
Contents Page 15 of 906 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787 Download operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 16
Page 16 of 906 Contents Software description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 NTVQ01xx Media Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 17
Contents Page 17 of 906 Configuring the QSDI card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 The TDS/DTR card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 Contents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 18
Page 18 of 906 553-3001-211 Contents Standard 3.
PAGE 19
20 Page 19 of 906 LIst of procedures Procedure 1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Procedure 2 Testing conference cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Procedure 3 Testing digitone receiver cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Procedure 4 Testing line cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Procedure 5 Testing multifrequency sender cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 20
Page 20 of 906 LIst of procedures Procedure 11 Connecting to the MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Procedure 12 Connecting two or more lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Procedure 13 Connecting two or more LEIs to the MMI terminal . . . 279 Procedure 14 Installing the NT5D97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Procedure 15 Removing the NT5D97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 21
26 Page 21 of 906 About this document This document is a global document. Contact your system supplier or your Nortel representative to verify that the hardware and software described are supported in your area. Subject This document outlines the functions, specifications, applications, and operation of the various circuit cards. Note 1: Line cards – This information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting the line cards to customer-provided station equipment.
PAGE 22
Page 22 of 906 About this document information about system messages, see the Software Input/Output: System Messages (553-3001-411). Note on legacy products and releases This NTP contains information about systems, components, and features that are compatible with Nortel Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5 software. For more information on legacy products and releases, click the Technical Documentation link under Support & Training on the Nortel home page: www.nortel.
PAGE 23
About this document Page 23 of 906 System migration When particular Meridian 1 systems are upgraded to run CS 1000 Release 4.5 software and configured to include a Signaling Server, they become CS 1000M systems. Table 1 lists each Meridian 1 system that supports an upgrade path to a CS 1000M system. Table 1 Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000M systems This Meridian 1 system...
PAGE 24
Page 24 of 906 About this document Conventions Terminology In this document, the following systems are referred to generically as “system”: • Communication Server 1000S (CS 1000S) • Communication Server 1000M (CS 1000M) • Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E) • Meridian 1 The following systems are referred to generically as “Small System”: • Communication Server 1000M Chassis (CS 1000M Chassis) • Communication Server 1000M Cabinet (CS 1000M Cabinet) • Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis • Meridian 1
PAGE 25
About this document Page 25 of 906 Related information This section lists information sources that relate to this document.
PAGE 26
Page 26 of 906 About this document CD-ROM To obtain Nortel documentation on CD-ROM, contact your Nortel customer representative. 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 27
78 Page 27 of 906 Overview Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Line cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog line interface units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 28
Page 28 of 906 Overview Line cards The following line cards are designed using the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) architecture and are recommended for use in all new system designs. Each of the line cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Table 2 lists the line card characteristics.
PAGE 29
Overview Page 29 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line card is an intelligent eight-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire analog terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500-type) telephones and analog modems. Each line has integral hazardous and surge voltage protection to protect the system from damage due to lightning strikes and accidental power line connections.
PAGE 30
Page 30 of 906 Overview NT8D09 analog message waiting line card The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is an intelligent 16-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500-type) telephones, modems, and key systems. This card can also provide a high-voltage, low-current signal on the Tip and Ring pair of each line to light the message waiting lamp on phones equipped with that feature.
PAGE 31
Overview Page 31 of 906 When installing line cards, follow these general procedures: • Configure the jumpers and switches on the line card (if any) to meet system needs. • Install the line card into the selected slot. • Install the cable that connects the backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel. • Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). • Connect the line card output to the selected terminal equipment at the MDF.
PAGE 32
Page 32 of 906 Overview • configure the card according to instructions issued by the system • report back to the system information such as card identification (type, vintage, and serial number), firmware version, and programmed configuration status) Table 3 IPE module architecture Parameter IPE Card Dimensions 31.75 x 25.4 x 2.2 cm. (12.5 x10.0 x 0.875 in.
PAGE 33
Overview • ringing signal on/off • message waiting lamp on/off Page 33 of 906 Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of the IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link.
PAGE 34
Page 34 of 906 Overview Input/output interface control Codec PCM Line Interface Unit Front panel LED Tip Ring Address/ data bus Analog or digital telephone lines Figure 2 Typical IPE analog line card architecture Microcontroller Card slot address Codec Card LAN interface PCM Line Interface Unit Async card LAN link Controller card Tx PCM Rx PCM 5.
PAGE 35
Overview Page 35 of 906 DS-30X loops The line interfaces provided by the line cards connect to conventional 2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. IPE analog line cards convert the incoming analog voice and signaling information to digital form and route it to the Call Server over DS-30X network loops. Conversely, digital voice and signaling information from the Call Server is sent over DS-30X network loops to the analog line cards where it is converted to analog form and applied to the line facility.
PAGE 36
Page 36 of 906 Overview Figure 3 DS-30X loop data format DS-30X loop data words 29 30 31 0 1 2 3 4 Frame sync 5.12 MHz 2.56 MHz Frame sync DS-30X loop W31DV W0B7 data bits W0B6 W0B5 SB = SIGNALING BIT W0B4 W0B3 W0B2 W0B1 W0B0 W0SB W0DV W1B7 DV = DATA VALID 553-6151 DS-30Y network loops extend between controller cards and superloop network cards in the Common Equipment (CE). They function in a manner similar to DS-30X loops. See Figure 5 on page 41.
PAGE 37
Overview Page 37 of 906 A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an IPE module. This bus is arranged in a master/slave configuration where the controller card is the master and all other cards are slaves. The module backplane provides each line/trunk card slot with a unique hardwired slot address. This slot address enables a slave card to respond when addressed by the controller card. The controller card communicates with only one slave at a time.
PAGE 38
Page 38 of 906 Overview Figure 4 Typical analog line interface unit block diagram Balancing Network DS-30X or SL-1 network loop Variable gain filters Tx PCM Rx PCM Impedance matching transformer 2-wire to 4-wire conversion CODEC Tip Line interface and protection Ring Off-hook Off-hook detector Ring voltage Ringing Ringing circuit Message waiting Message waiting circuit –150V dc 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 39
Overview Page 39 of 906 Coder/Decoder circuit The Coder/Decoder (CODEC) performs Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either the A-Law or the µ-Law companding algorithm. On some analog line cards, the decoding algorithm depends of the type of CODEC installed when the board is built. On others, it is an option selected using a software overlay.
PAGE 40
Page 40 of 906 Overview (nominal) ringing voltage power supply is used to prevent switching of the relay during the current peak. This eliminates switching glitches and extends the life of the switching relay. The off-hook detection circuit monitors the current draw on the phone line. When the current draw exceeds a preset value, the circuit generates an off-hook signal that is transmitted back to the system controller.
PAGE 41
Overview Page 41 of 906 Figure 5 Digital line interface unit block diagram DS-30X loop Tx PCM Rx PCM Tip Digital line interface circuit 4-wire to 2-wire conversion TCM loop interface and protection 1 kHz frame sync Ring ±15 V dc power supply 553-6154 voltage protection between the TCM loop and the digital line interface circuit. It also provides power for the digital telephone.
PAGE 42
Page 42 of 906 Overview the system controller to operate the digital line interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller and return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X network loop. Analog line call operation The applications, features, and signalling arrangements for each line interface unit are configured in software and implemented on the card through software download messages.
PAGE 43
Overview Page 43 of 906 Figure 6 Call connection sequence – near-end station receiving call Near-end station Far-end station through PSTN System State Line card unit idle Alert Near-end station off hook Signal/direction Ground on tip/ battery on ring Highresistance loop Line card unit idle Far-end station on hook Line card unit idle No battery current drawn. Far-end station goes off hook and addresses (dials up) near-end station.
PAGE 44
Page 44 of 906 Overview Figure 7 Call connection sequence – near-end originating call Near-end station Far-end station through PSTN System State Line card unit idle Signal/direction Ground on tip/ battery on ring Highresistance loop Low-resistance loop Call request Dial tone Dial tone Near-end station dials number (loop pulsing or DTMF tones). The system decodes addressing, routes call, and supplies ringback tone to near-end station if farend station is on hook.
PAGE 45
Overview Page 45 of 906 Message waiting Line cards that are equipped with the message waiting feature receive notification that a message is waiting across the Card LAN link (IPE cards). On cards that drive a message waiting light, the light is turned on by connecting the ring side of the telephone line to the –150 V dc power supply. When the line card senses that the telephone has gone off-hook, it removes the –150 V dc voltage until the telephone goes back on-hook.
PAGE 46
Page 46 of 906 Overview causes the line card to revert the battery and ground signals to the normal state to signal that the call is complete. Hook Flash disconnect supervision Hook flash disconnect supervision is only used for incoming calls that terminate at the terminal device (typically a Key system). See Figure 9 on page 48. The disconnect signal is indicated by the removal of the ground connection to the tip lead for a specific length of time.
PAGE 47
Overview Page 47 of 906 Figure 8 Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision sequence Far-end station System State Line card unit idle Call request Line card Near-end station Signal/direction Ground on tip/ battery on ring Highresistance loop Low-resistance loop Dial tone Outpulsing Remarks No battery current drawn. Near-end station goes off hook. Battery current is drawn causing detection of off-hook state. The system determines unit terminal number (TN) and assigns message timeslots.
PAGE 48
Page 48 of 906 Overview Figure 9 Hook flash disconnect supervision sequence System Far-end station State Line card unit idle Line card Near-end station Signal/direction Ground on tip/ battery on ring Highresistance loop Ringing Far-end station on hook Near-end station on hook Line card unit idle The system applies 20 Hz ringing to the ring lead. Low-resistance loop Near-end station off hook (2-way voice connection) No battery current drawn.
PAGE 49
Overview Page 49 of 906 Call operation will be described by categorizing the operation into the following main states: • Idle (on-hook) • Incoming calls • Outgoing calls • Calls disconnected by the CO • Calls disconnected by the telephone Loop Start Mode In Loop Start mode , the A and B bits have the following meaning: Transmit from LTI:A bit = 0 (tip ground on) B bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off) Receive to LTI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed) B bit = 1 (no ring ground) When a T1 channel is idle, the
PAGE 50
Page 50 of 906 Overview Outgoing calls During outgoing calls from the terminal equipment, a channel is seized when the station goes off-hook. This simulates a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the lineside T1 card, causing the lineside T1’s receive A bit to be changed from 0 to 1. This bit change prepares the lineside T1 to receive digits.
PAGE 51
Overview Page 51 of 906 • In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls terminating on the lineside T1 card, the hook flash feature within the SAL software must be enabled. • In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls originating and terminating on the lineside T1 card, both the battery reversal and hook flash features must be enabled within the SAL software.
PAGE 52
Page 52 of 906 Overview Table 4 Loop Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings (Part 2 of 2) Transmit Receive State A B A B • Steady state (call in progress) 0 1 1 1 • Far end disconnects by dropping loop current and lineside T1 card changes Transmit A bit to 1 momentarily. 1 1 1 1 • Terminal equipment responds causing Receive A bit to change to 0. 1 1 0 1 • Lineside T1 responds by changing its Transmit A bit to 0. Call is terminated and set to idle state.
PAGE 53
Overview Page 53 of 906 Incoming Calls Incoming calls to terminal equipment that is connected to the lineside T1 card can originate either from stations that are local (served by the PBX), or remote (served through the public switched telephone network).
PAGE 54
Page 54 of 906 Overview Note: By default, the SAL feature opens the tip side for 750 m/s in loop start operation. This is configurable in 10 m/s increments. • In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls originating on the lineside T1 card, the “battery reversal” feature within the SAL software must be enabled. Enabling the “battery reversal” feature will not provide battery reversal indication when a call is answered; it will only provide battery reversal indication when a call is disconnected.
PAGE 55
Overview Page 55 of 906 Table 5 Ground Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings (Part 2 of 2) Transmit Receive State A B A B • Terminal equipment goes off-hook by simulating ground on tip lead and ringing on ring lead. 0 0/1 1 1 • Idle 1 1 0 1 • Terminal equipment goes off-hook.
PAGE 56
Page 56 of 906 Overview Distant end disconnect restrictions If the SAL feature is not available in the CS 1000 Release 4.5 software, the lineside T1 card is not capable of indicating to the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) when a call has been terminated by the distant end. In this case, the lineside T1 card will continue to provide a grounded tip indication (A=0) to the CPE until it detects an open loop indication (A=0) from the CPE, at which time it will provide an open tip indication (A=1).
PAGE 57
Overview Page 57 of 906 Voice frequency audio level The digital pad for lineside T1 card audio level is fixed for all types of call connection (0 dB insertion loss in both directions), and differs from the analog line. Audio level adjustments, if required, must be made in the lineside T1 terminal equipment.
PAGE 58
Page 58 of 906 Overview Nortel has tested line protection devices from three manufacturers. See Table 6. Each manufacturer offers devices for protection of digital as well as analog telephone lines.
PAGE 59
Overview Page 59 of 906 grounding connection requirements as described in System installation (553-3001-210). This requirement includes connecting the ground for the protection devices to the approved building earth ground reference. Any variances to these grounding requirements could limit the functionality of the protection device.
PAGE 60
Page 60 of 906 Overview Each of the trunk cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Use Table 7 to help select the trunk card that will best meet system needs.
PAGE 61
Overview Page 61 of 906 The universal trunk card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features.
PAGE 62
Page 62 of 906 Overview Figure 10 IPE trunk cards installed in an NT8D37 IPE module IPE Intelligent line cards Intelligent trunk cards BRSC PE Pwr Sup Rng Gen 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 NT8D01 Controller Card PE Module Cont Intelligent line cards Intelligent trunk cards BRSC 8 9 10 11 12 13 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment 14 15 Superloop Shelf 553-6321 3 Install the cable that connects the backplane connector on the IPE module to the module I/O panel.
PAGE 63
Overview Page 63 of 906 Operation This section describes how trunk cards fit into the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 architecture, the buses that carry signals to and from the trunk cards, and how they connect to terminal equipment. See Table 8 for IPE parameters. Host interface bus Cards based on the IPE bus have a built-in microcontroller.
PAGE 64
Page 64 of 906 Overview Figure 11 Typical IPE trunk card architecture Codec PCM Trunk Interface Unit Front panel LED Tip Ring Trunk lines Input/output interface control Address/ data bus Microcontroller Card slot address Codec Card LAN interface PCM Trunk Interface Unit Async card LAN link Controller card Tip Ring Trunk lines Backplane Tx PCM Rx PCM 5.
PAGE 65
Overview Page 65 of 906 The switch communicates with IPE modules over two separate interfaces. Voice and signaling data are sent and received over DS-30X loops and maintenance data is sent over a separate asynchronous communication link called the card LAN link. Signaling data is information directly related to the operation of the telephone line.
PAGE 66
Page 66 of 906 Overview DS-30X loops The interfaces provided by the line and trunk cards connect to conventional 2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. IPE analog line and trunk cards convert the incoming analog voice and signaling information to digital form, and route it to the Common Equipment (CE) CPU over DS-30X network loops.
PAGE 67
Overview Page 67 of 906 Figure 12 DS-30X loop data format DS-30X loop data words 29 30 31 0 1 2 3 4 Frame sync 5.12 MHz 2.56 MHz Frame sync DS-30X loop W31DV W0B7 data bits W0B6 W0B5 SB = SIGNALING BIT W0B4 W0B3 W0B2 W0B1 W0B0 W0SB W0DV W1B7 DV = DATA VALID 553-6151 signaling data to the line card, it is sent as a 24-bit word divided among 24 successive DS-30X frames.
PAGE 68
Page 68 of 906 Overview Figure 13 Network connections to IPE modules Common Equipment (Network) NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D04 Superloop Network Card DS-30Y loop NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card NT8D01 Controller Card DS-30X NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card NT8D13 PE Module QPC414 Network Card Large System Network loop QPC659 Dual-Loop Peripheral Buffer Card QPC71 E&M Signaling and Paging Trunk Card QPC74 Recorded Announcement Trunk Card QPC250 Release Link Trunk Card QPC449 Loop Signaling Trunk Card 553-6158 553-3
PAGE 69
Overview Page 69 of 906 link is composed of two asynchronous serial buses (called the Async card LAN link in Figure 11 on page 64). The output bus is used by the controller for output of control data to the trunk card. The input bus is used by the controller for input of trunk card status data. A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an IPE module (or IPE section of a CE module).
PAGE 70
Page 70 of 906 Overview trunk line through an impedance matching and balance network. The trunk interface also includes the logic necessary to place outgoing call signaling onto the trunk, or the logic to connect to special services such as recorded announcement and paging equipment. Figure 14 shows a typical example of the logic that performs these functions. Each part of the trunk interface unit is discussed in the following section.
PAGE 71
Overview Page 71 of 906 Variable gain filters Audio signals received from the analog phone trunk are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that limits the frequency spread of the input signal to a nominal 200–3400 Hz bandwidth. The audio signal is then applied to the input of the codec. Audio signals coming from the CODEC are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that integrates the amplitude modulated pulses coming from the CODEC, and then filters and amplifies the result.
PAGE 72
Page 72 of 906 Overview Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board provides four bidirectional asynchronous serial ports for the system processor, and the QPC841 QSDI card also provides four. Any device that conforms to the RS-232-C serial communication standard can be connected to these serial ports. The QPC513 ESDI card provides two fully synchronous serial ports for the system processor.
PAGE 73
Overview Page 73 of 906 not consume a module slot. The RS-232-C connections are brought out through special cables to the backplane I/O panel. The QPC841 Quad SDI card and the QPC513 Enhanced SDI card mount in standard backplane slots, and their serial interface connectors are located on the card front panels. A list of the modules that they can be mounted in is given in the following sections on the individual cards.
PAGE 74
Page 74 of 906 Overview — Data terminal equipment (DTE) emulation mode — Data communication equipment (DCE) emulation mode • enable/disable switch and LED • input/output (I/O) device address selectable by on-board switches.
PAGE 75
Overview Page 75 of 906 Power consumption The SDI cards obtain their power directly from the module backplane. Power consumption for each of the cards is shown in Table 10. Table 10 Power consumption Maximum power consumption Voltage NT8D41BA QPC513 QPC841 +5 VDC ±5% 1.0 Amp 3.0 Amp 1.5 Amp +12 VDC ±5% 100 mA 50 mA 100 mA –12 VDC ±5% 100 mA 50 mA 100 mA Environmental The SDI cards operate without degradation under the conditions listed in Table 11.
PAGE 76
Page 76 of 906 Overview Electromagnetic interference The CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 systems meet the requirements of FCC Part 15 and CSA C108.8 electromagnetic interference (EMI) standards as a class “A” computing device. To accomplish this, the SDI cables must exit the module through EMI filters on the I/O panel. Reliability The Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) for all SDI cards is 55 years at 40°C and 29 years at 55°C.
PAGE 77
Overview Page 77 of 906 The following maintenance program is used to maintain individual SDI synchronous ports. • LD 48 Link Diagnostic – For checking Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Meridian Link ports. Instructions for running the various maintenance programs are found in Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311). System messages are interpreted in Software Input/Output: System Messages (553-3001-411).
PAGE 78
Page 78 of 906 553-3001-211 Overview Standard 3.
PAGE 79
88 Page 79 of 906 Circuit card installation Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Card slots — Large System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Circuit card installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Installing a circuit card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 80
Page 80 of 906 Circuit card installation Circuit card installation Table 12 Large System card slots (Part 1 of 4) Component Large System A0786611 Call Processor Pentium II® card 81C Core/Net: “CP” A0810486 Call Processor Pentium II 81C Core/Net: “CP” NT1P61 Fiber Superloop Network card Core/Net: 0–7 NT1P62 Fiber Peripheral Controller card IPE: “Contr” NT1R52 Remote Carrier Interface IPE: “Contr” NT1R20 Off-Premise Station IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT4D18 Hybrid Bus Terminator Core/Net: betw
PAGE 81
Circuit card installation Page 81 of 906 Table 12 Large System card slots (Part 2 of 4) Component Large System NT5K02 Analog Line card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5K07 Universal Trunk card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5K18 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5K19 E&M Trunk card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT5K35 D-channel Handler Interface Core/Net: 0-7 Net: 5-12 NT5K36 Direct Inward/Direct Outward Dial Trunk card
PAGE 82
Page 82 of 906 Circuit card installation Table 12 Large System card slots (Part 3 of 4) Component Large System NT6D71 U Interface Line card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT6D72 Basic Rate Signal Concentrator card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT6D73 Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor card Core/Net: 0–7 NT6D80 MSDL Core/Net: 0–7 NT7D16 Data Access card IPE: any slot but “Contr” NT7R51 Local Carrier Interface Core/Net: 0–7 NT8D01 Controller card IPE: “Contr” NT8D02 Digital Line card IPE: any sl
PAGE 83
Circuit card installation Page 83 of 906 Table 12 Large System card slots (Part 4 of 4) Component Large System NTCK43AA Primary Rate Interface card Core/Net: 0-7 Net: 5-11, 13-14 NTRB33 FIber Junctor Interface card For 81C: Core/Net: 8 and 9, Net module: 2 and 3 NTRE39 Optical Cable Management card For 81C: Net module: the slot to the right side of 14, the slot to the left of the 3PE in slot 1 QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card Core/Net: 10 Net: 4 QPC71 E&M/DX Trunk card IPE: any slot but “Contr”
PAGE 84
Page 84 of 906 Circuit card installation Precautions To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, review the following guidelines before handling system equipment. WARNING Module covers are not hinged; do not let go of the covers. Lift covers away from the module and set them out of your work area. WARNING Circuit cards may contain a lithium battery. There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not replace components on any circuit card; you must replace the entire card.
PAGE 85
Circuit card installation Page 85 of 906 • Keep cards installed in the system as much as possible to avoid dirty contacts and unnecessary wear. • Store cards in a cool, dry, dust-free area.
PAGE 86
Page 86 of 906 Circuit card installation • Hardware disable cards, whenever there is an enable/disable switch, before they are removed or inserted. • Return defective or heavily contaminated cards to a repair center. Do not try to repair or clean them. Installing a circuit card This procedure provides detailed installation instructions for circuit cards.
PAGE 87
Circuit card installation Page 87 of 906 Figure 16 Installing the circuit card in the card cage Edge of card cage Card locking device Tab Latch post Card guides 553-5002 7 Insert the card into the card aligning guides in the card cage. Gently push the card into the slot until you feel resistance. The tip of the locking device must be behind the edge of the card cage (see Figure 16). 8 Lock the card into position by simultaneously pushing the ends of the locking devices against the faceplate.
PAGE 88
Page 88 of 906 Circuit card installation 9 If there is an enable/disable switch, set it to Enb. Note: Do not enable the switch on an NT8D04 Superloop Network card or QPC414 Network card until network loop cables are installed.
PAGE 89
100 Page 89 of 906 Acceptance tests Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Conference cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Digitone receiver cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Line cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 90
Page 90 of 906 Acceptance tests Conference cards Procedure 2 Testing conference cards Use this procedure to test a conference card or to test the conference function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card.
PAGE 91
Acceptance tests 4 Page 91 of 906 Test the conference loop for channel, group, and switching faults: CNFC loop If the conference loop passes the tests, the output is OK. If the system response is other than OK, see the Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages.
PAGE 92
Page 92 of 906 Acceptance tests Again, see “LD 38” in the Software Input/Output: Maintenance (553-3001-511) for detailed information on using this command. 7 End the session in LD 38: **** End of Procedure Digitone receiver cards Procedure 3 Testing digitone receiver cards Use this procedure to test a Digitone receiver (DTR) card, a DTR daughterboard, or the DTR function on the NT8D18 Network/DTR card.
PAGE 93
Acceptance tests Page 93 of 906 Line cards Procedure 4 Testing line cards Use this procedure to test a line card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signaling test on a specific loop and shelf: LD 30 SHLF l sloop and shelf numbers If the system response is other than OK, see the Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages.
PAGE 94
Page 94 of 906 Acceptance tests Multifrequency sender cards Procedure 5 Testing multifrequency sender cards Use this procedure to test a multifrequency sender (MFS) card or the MFS function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Test and enable an MFS loop: LD 46 MFS loop (on the NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, the TDS/MFS loop is the even loop of the conference/TDS loop pair) Note: The conference/TDS card is not enabled automatically when it is inserted.
PAGE 95
Acceptance tests Page 95 of 906 Multifrequency signaling cards Procedure 6 Testing multifrequency signaling cards Use this procedure to test a multifrequency signaling card. 1 Log into the system: LOGI (password) 2 Test and enable the specified unit: LD 54 ATST l s c u loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers If the system response is other than OK, see the Software Input/ Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages.
PAGE 96
Page 96 of 906 Acceptance tests 3 End the session in LD 30: **** End of Procedure Trunk cards Use the following procedures to test a trunk card. Procedure 8 Testing a trunk card using a maintenance telephone 1 Access the system from a maintenance telephone. See “Communicating with the Meridian 1” in the Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for details on accessing the system from a maintenance telephone.
PAGE 97
Acceptance tests Page 97 of 906 When you see the DN? prompt, enter the directory number (DN) you want the system to dial. If the system response is other than OK, see the Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages.
PAGE 98
Page 98 of 906 Acceptance tests For other than an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter: ENLL loop 4 Test the TDS loop: TDS loop If the system response is other than OK, see the Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to analyze the messages. 5 End the session in LD 34: **** 6 Using a maintenance telephone, log into the system. See “Communicating with the Meridian 1” in the Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for details on accessing the system using a maintenance telephone.
PAGE 99
Acceptance tests Page 99 of 906 Table 13 TDS tone tests RNG#loop## **** 764#loop## Provides ring tone from TDS loop specified. Exits TDS test program.
PAGE 100
Page 100 of 906 553-3001-211 Acceptance tests Standard 3.
PAGE 101
156 Page 101 of 906 Option settings Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Circuit card grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 General purpose switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 102
Page 102 of 906 Option settings QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 QPC471 Clock Controller card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 QPC595 Digitone Receiver cards . . .
PAGE 103
Option settings Page 103 of 906 Throughout this document, if neither ON nor OFF is given (there is a blank space) for a position on a switch, that position may be set to either ON or OFF because it has no function for the option described.
PAGE 104
Page 104 of 906 Option settings NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card Table 14 lists option settings for the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station analog card. Table 14 OPS analog line card configuration (Part 1 of 3) Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) ONP OPX Loop resistance (ohms) 0–460 0–2300 (Note 2) Jumper strap setting (Note 6) Both JX.0 and JX.1 off Both JX.0 and JX.1 off Both JX.0 and JX.
PAGE 105
Option settings Page 105 of 906 Table 14 OPS analog line card configuration (Part 2 of 3) Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) ONP OPX Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) Loop loss (dB) (Note 3) 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–3.0 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–4.5 >4.5–15 TIMP (Notes 1, 4) 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms Note 1: Configured in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program (LD 10).
PAGE 106
Page 106 of 906 Option settings Table 14 OPS analog line card configuration (Part 3 of 3) Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) ONP OPX Class of Service (CLS) (Note 1) BIMP (Notes 1, 4) 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 Gain treatment (Note 5) 600 ohms 3COM1 No 3COM2 3COM2 Yes Note 1: Configured in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program (LD 10). Note 2: The maximum signaling range supported by the OPS analog line card is 2300 ohms.
PAGE 107
Option settings Page 107 of 906 NT5D12AA Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card Switch setting tables for this card are listed in subsections according to their function. Bold font designates factory (default) settings. General purpose switches Use switch set SW9 for Trunk 0; use switch set SW15 for Trunk 1 (see Table 15).
PAGE 108
Page 108 of 906 Option settings A set of three switches provides selection of dB values. Use SW5, SW6, and SW7 for Trunk 0; use SW11, SW12, and SW13 for Trunk 1 (see Table 17). Table 17 Trunk interface line build out switch settings Switch Setting Description SW5/SW11 SW6/SW12 SW7/SW13 0 dB off off off 7.5 dB on on off 15 dB on off on A set of four DIP switches provides selection among three values for receiver impedance. Use SW8 for Trunk 0; use SW14 for Trunk 1 (see Table 18).
PAGE 109
Option settings Page 109 of 906 Ring ground switches A set of four DIP switches selects which Ring lines are connected to ground (see Table 19).
PAGE 110
Page 110 of 906 Option settings DCH mode and address select switches One switch selects an on-board NTBK51AA D-Channel daughterboard and an external MSDL/DCHI card. Four other switches provide the daughterboard address (see Table 20). Table 20 DCH mode and address select switch settings Switch Description S3 Switch Setting 1-4 D-Channel daughterboard Address See the next table.
PAGE 111
Option settings Page 111 of 906 Table 21 NTBK51AA daughterboard address select switch settings (Part 2 of 2) Device Address1 Switch Setting 9 on off off on 10 off on off on 11 on on off on 12 off off on on 13 on off on on 14 off on on on 15 on on on on Note 1: The maximum number of DCHI, MSDL, and DDCH devices in the system is 16. The Device Addresses are equivalent to the MSDL DNUM designations.
PAGE 112
Page 112 of 906 Option settings Figure 18 Switch functions and areas DDP Faceplate Port 0 J5 1 S9 S8 S7 2 3 Port 1 4 1 2 3 4 General Purpose Switches S15 Receiver S14 Impedence Line S13 J6 Build Out S6 Switches S5 1 2 3 S12 S11 4 S2 S4 1 S3 Transmission 2 3 4 5 Mode 6 7 S10 8 DCH Mode and Address Select 553-7308 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 113
Option settings Page 113 of 906 Figure 19 displays default settings for switches on the NT5D12AA DDP card.
PAGE 114
Page 114 of 906 Option settings NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC Tables 22 through 27 list option settings for the NT6D42 Ringing Generator.
PAGE 115
Option settings Page 115 of 906 Table 25 NT6D42 SW1 Ringing frequency (Hz) Position SW1 20 1 25 2 50 3 Table 26 NT6D42CB SW2 SW2 Ringing voltage Message waiting voltage 1 2 3 4 86 V ac –120 V dc off off off off 86 V ac –150 V dc off off off on 80 V ac –120 V dc on off off off 80 V ac –150 V dc on off off on 75 V ac –120 V dc off on off off 75 V ac –150 V dc off on off on 70 V ac –120 V dc off off on off 70 V ac –150 V dc off off on on Circuit C
PAGE 116
Page 116 of 906 Option settings Table 27 NT6D42CC SW2 SW2 Ringing voltage Message waiting voltage 1 2 3 4 86 V ac –100 V dc off off off off 86 V ac –150 V dc off off off on 80 V ac –100 V dc on off off off 80 V ac –150 V dc on off off on 75 V ac –100 V dc off on off off 75 V ac –150 V dc off on off on 70 V ac –100 V dc off off on off 70 V ac –150 V dc off off on on 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 117
Option settings Page 117 of 906 NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane Table 28 NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane Jumper Location (between slots) Core/Network 1 Core/Network 0 JB1 14/15 Jumper plug not installed Plug installed Note: Berg jumper is located at the bottom of the primary side of the backplane. (This is inside the card cage assembly.
PAGE 118
Page 118 of 906 Option settings NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card Table 30 NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card Port 0—SW4 Port 0—SW8 all off all off all on all off all on all off Port 1—SW3 Port 1—SW7 all off all off all on all off all on all off Port 2—SW2 Port 2—SW6 all off all off all on all off all on all off Port 3—SW1 Port 3—SW5 all off all off all on all off all on all off RS-232-D DTE or DCE* RS-422-A DTE (terminal) RS-422-A DCE (modem) RS-232-D DTE or DCE* RS-422-
PAGE 119
Option settings Page 119 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Tables 31 through 35 list option settings for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.
PAGE 120
Page 120 of 906 Option settings Table 32 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings—factory standard Jumper strap settings Trunk types Loop length CO/FX/WATS Zero–1524 m (5000 ft) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X Off Off 1–2 1–2 2-way tie (LDR) 2-way tie (OAID) DID Zero–600 ohms RAN: continuous operation mode Not applicable: RAN and paging trunks should not leave the building. Paging Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; “X” indicates the unit number, 0–7.
PAGE 121
Option settings Page 121 of 906 Table 33 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings—extended range Jumper strap settings Trunk types Loop length CO/FX/WATS J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X > 1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3 DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: pulse start or level start modes Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 2–3 1–2 2-way tie (LDR) 2-way tie (OAID) Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.
PAGE 122
Page 122 of 906 Option settings Table 34 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB trunk types—termination impedance and balance network (Part 2 of 2) Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) Terminating impedance (Note 1) Trunk types Zero–915 m (zero–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) 2-way tie (OAID) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 DID (loop < 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2 DID (loop Š 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms N/A 3COM2 RAN: continuous operation mode
PAGE 123
Option settings Page 123 of 906 Table 35 NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable loop resistance and loss Cable loop resistance (ohms) Cable loop loss (dB) (non-loaded at 1kHz) Cable length 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 915 m (3000 ft) 97 155 251 0.9 1.2 1.5 1524 m (5000 ft) 162 260 417 1.6 2.0 2.5 2225 m (7300 ft) 236 378 609 2.3 3.0 3.7 3566 m (11700 ft) 379 607 977 3.7 4.8 6.0 5639 m (18500 ft) 600 960 1544 5.9 7.6 9.
PAGE 124
Page 124 of 906 Option settings NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Table 36 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk DX tip & ring pair Jumper (Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—rcv M—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X off off off off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X on on (Note 3) on on off off J3.X off off off off (Note 4) (Note 4) J4.X off off off off Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 J5.X off off off off (Note 4) (Note 4) J6.X off off off off on on J7.
PAGE 125
Option settings Page 125 of 906 NT8D17 Conference/TDS card Switch and jumper settings are used to select the companding law and to change the conference attenuation PAD levels. These PAD levels are used if prompt CPAD = 1 in LD97. The J1 connector on the faceplate is reserved for future use. You can enable or disable a warning tone for conference calls. When the option is enabled, the tone lets callers know they are entering a conference call.
PAGE 126
Page 126 of 906 Option settings NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC Settings Frequency Amplitude P1 P2 P3 20 Hz 86 V ac open open 2–5 8–11 25 Hz 70 V ac open 1–4 7–10 open 25 Hz 80 V ac open 3–6 9–12 open 25 Hz 86 V ac open 2–5 8–11 open 50 Hz 70 V ac 1–4 7–10 open open 50 Hz 80 V ac 3–6 9–12 open open 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 127
Option settings Page 127 of 906 NT8D22 System Monitor The master system monitor, located in the column with CP 0, must be numbered 0. Slave system monitors are numbered from 1 to 63. For examples of system monitor option settings in basic configurations, see “Sample settings for NT8D22 System Monitors.
PAGE 128
Page 128 of 906 Option settings Configure the system monitor in Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) columns as slaves. There is no serial connection between RPE columns.
PAGE 129
Option settings Page 129 of 906 Table 38 NT8D22 SW2 Position SW2 indication 1 Master system monitor Slave system monitor on off Not used All other operation 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 on off For master, indicates total number of slaves Configure 3–8 according to the Table 40 on page 130. For each slave, indicates the slave address Configure 3–8 according to the Table 41 on page 131.
PAGE 130
Page 130 of 906 Option settings Table 40 NT8D22 settings for total number of slaves—SW2 on master Switch position How many slave units 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on on on on on on on on off off off off off off off off on on
PAGE 131
Option settings Page 131 of 906 Table 41 NT8D22 slave address—SW2 on slave Position Slave unit address 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on off on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on on on on on on on on off off off off off off off off on on on on on on on on off off off
PAGE 132
Page 132 of 906 Option settings NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Baud rate Switches SW13, SW10, SW11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See the configuration for these switches in Table 42. Table 42 QSDI paddle board baud rate switch settings SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2), SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4) Baud rate Baud Clock (kHz) 1 2 3 4 150 2.40 on off on on 300 4.80 on on off on 600 9.60 on off off on 1,200 19.
PAGE 133
Option settings Page 133 of 906 configurations for both switches are shown in Table 43. To avoid system problems, switches SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identically.
PAGE 134
Page 134 of 906 Option settings Table 44 QSDI paddle board DTE/DCE mode switch settings Port 1 — SW 3 Port 1 —SW 2 Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off Port 2 — SW 5 Port 2 — SW4 DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off Port 3 — SW 7 Port 3— SW 6 DTE (terminal) on
PAGE 135
Option settings Page 135 of 906 Figure 20 NT8D72 DIP switch settings NT8D72AA, NT8D72AB 75 ohm switch setting 120 ohm switch setting (default) OFF OFF or ON 1 2 1 2 S1 S2 S1 S2 ON NT8D72BA 75 ohm switch setting 120 ohm switch setting (default) OFF OFF or ON 1 2 1 2 S1 S2 S1 S2 ON 553-7463 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 136
Page 136 of 906 Option settings QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card Options (minimum vintage N) Plug location NT5D21 Core/Network module F13 NT8D35 Network module QPC71 E&M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk cards Unit 0 E35 switch Unit 1 E5 switch Application 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E&M off off off on off off on off off off off on off off on off Paging off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off DX 2-wire (conductor loop < 2.
PAGE 137
Option settings Page 137 of 906 QPC414 Network card Application Pin connection J3/S2 and J4/S1 T-1 facilities (including PRI/DTI),* channel service unit connect pins 1 and 2 (pin 1 is next to the white dot) Note 1: Possible jumper locations for vintage B (for different styles/series): J3—E11 or H11 J4—H17 or E7 S1 and S2—E33 Note 2: Possible jumper locations for vintage A (for different styles/series).
PAGE 138
Page 138 of 906 Option settings QPC441 3-Port Extender cards For CS 1000M SG and Multi Group systems, QPC441 vintage F or later must be used in all modules. Table 45 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT4N41CP PII Core/Net modules Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to “A”.
PAGE 139
Option settings Page 139 of 906 Table 46 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT5D21 modules Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to “A”.
PAGE 140
Page 140 of 906 Option settings Table 47 QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT8D35 module Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to “A”.
PAGE 141
Option settings Page 141 of 906 QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards Table 48 and Table 49 on page 142 list option settings for loop signaling trunk cards.
PAGE 142
Page 142 of 906 Option settings Table 49 QPC559, QPC560 double density Double density—Unit 0/1/2/3 H17/H3/A17/A3 switch Application 1 2 3 4 5 6 loop pulsing off off off off off off battery and ground pulsing off off off off on off on off on off on off Outgoing ANI only: Other than outgoing ANI Jumpers (QPC560) Units 0/1/2/3 600 ¾ resistive impedance connect pins 1 and 2 3-component complex impedance connect pins 2 and 3 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 143
Option settings Page 143 of 906 QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards Table 50 lists switch and jumper settings for options available.
PAGE 144
Page 144 of 906 Option settings QPC471 Clock Controller card Table 51 lists option settings for the QPC471 Clock Controller card. Table 51 QPC471 vintage H SW1 System SW2 SW4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 61C on on on on off off off off off on * * 81 off off off off off off off off off on * * 81C on off off off off off off off ** on * * 81C with Fiber Network on off off off off off off off ** on * * 0–4.3 m (0–14 ft) off off 4.6–6.
PAGE 145
Option settings Page 145 of 906 QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card Switches at E29/E9/A29/A11 Units 0/1/2/3 Application 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Zero ohm outpulsing on off off Standard outpulsing off on off Ground start on on off Loop start off off off Loop start, automatic guard detection off on off PPM daughterboard not installed on off PPM daughterboard installed off off Battery on M operation off on off Ground on M operation on off off Second pair M&MM off
PAGE 146
Page 146 of 906 Option settings QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card Tables 52 through 56 give the option settings for the QPC550 DID Trunk card. Table 52 QPC550 vintages A and B—real/complex balance impedance selection Impedance type Device location Device designation Switch number Unit number Real Complex F31 S4.0 1 0 on off F24 S4.1 1 1 on off F16 S4.2 1 2 on off F11 S4.
PAGE 147
Option settings Page 147 of 906 Table 54 QPC550 vintage A—software/hardware control for 2dB pad 2 dB pad control H/W Device location Device designation Unit number Switch number S/W (pad in) (pad out) F38 S1 0 1 off off on 2 on off off 3 on off off 4 off off on 1 off off on 2 on off off 3 on off off 4 off off on 1 F1 S2 0 1 Table 55 QPC550 vintage B—attenuation level control Switch number Device location Device designation Unit number 1 D39 S2.
PAGE 148
Page 148 of 906 Option settings Table 56 QPC550 vintage B—software control for 2dB pad 2 dB pad control H/W Device location Device designation Unit number Switch number (pad in) (pad out) F38 S1.0/1 1 1 on off 2 off off 3 off off 4 on off 1 on off 2 off off 3 off off 4 on off 0 F1 S1.2/3 3 2 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 149
Option settings Page 149 of 906 QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card Signal duration on the 18-pair faceplate S1 (F33) Binary value (.1 second) 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 4 8 16 32 Note: This switch determines the length of time a signal stays on the 18-pair data bus. The time is set in binary to the nearest tenth second. For example, to keep data on the bus for 5 seconds, the switch settings total 50 by closing S1.2, S1.5, and S1.6. Signal duration and pause time S2 (G33) Binary value (.
PAGE 150
Page 150 of 906 Option settings QPC595 Digitone Receiver cards Location Connection 12 DTMF tones E9 Center to E3 16 DTMF tones E9 Center to E2 QPC577, QPC596 Digitone Receiver daughterboards 16/12 tone options jumper Jumper at P1 16 tone (4 x 4) connect pins 1 and 2 12 tone (3 x 4) connect pins 2 and 3 Note: When a DTR daughterboard is installed, check YES on the faceplate of the QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer.
PAGE 151
Option settings Page 151 of 906 Table 57 QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card (Part 2 of 2) Switch S2 settings To repeater facility To cross-connect point 1, 3, 7 on 136–225 m (451–750 ft) 101–200 m (356–655 ft) Switch 3 option for DTI with ESF SW3-1 on = extended superframe format (ESF) off = superframe format (SF) Note 1: All positions on S2 (location B22) are OFF except as shown under the column labeled “Switch S2 settings.
PAGE 152
Page 152 of 906 Option settings QPC775 Clock Controller card Tables 58 and 59 give option settings for the QPC775 Clock Controller card.
PAGE 153
Option settings Page 153 of 906 QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card Tables 60 through 62 list option settings for the QPC841 4-Port SDI card.
PAGE 154
Page 154 of 906 Option settings Device number SW15 Port 3 Port 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 off off off off off on on on 2 3 off off off off off on on off 4 5 off off off off off on off on 6 7 off off off off off on off off 8 9 off off off off off off on on 10 11 off off off off off off on off 12 13 off off off off off off off on 14 15 off off off off off off off off Note 1: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF.
PAGE 155
Option settings Page 155 of 906 Table 62 QPC841 DTE or DCE selection Mode Port 1—SW8 Port 1—SW9 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 DTE (terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on NT1P61 (Fiber) on off off on off off on off off off on on Port 2—SW6 Port 2—SW7 DTE on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE off off off off off off on on on on on on NT1P61 (Fiber) on off
PAGE 156
Page 156 of 906 553-3001-211 Option settings Standard 3.
PAGE 157
182 Page 157 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Electrical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 158
Page 158 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card used whenever the phone lines have to leave the building in which the switch is installed. The NT1R20 OPS analog line card provides: • line supervision • hookflash • battery reversal Each unit is independently configured by software control in the Analog (500/ 2500 type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. You can install this card in any IPE slot.
PAGE 159
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 159 of 906 Figure 21 OPS analog line card – faceplate Card lock latch LED OPS Anlg LC S This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card NT1R20 Rlse 0x Card lock latch 553-6190 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 160
Page 160 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Functional description This functional description of the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card is divided into two parts. First, a description of the card’s control, signaling, and power interfaces is given, followed by a description of how the card itself functions. See Figure 22.
PAGE 161
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 161 of 906 Card interfaces Voice and signaling interfaces The eight line interfaces provided by the NT1R20 OPS analog line card connect to conventional, 2-wire (tip and ring), analog line facilities. Incoming analog voice and signaling information from a line facility is converted by the OPS analog line card to digital form and routed to the CPU over DS-30 network loops.
PAGE 162
Page 162 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Line interface units The NT1R20 OPS analog line card contains eight independently configurable interface units. Relays are provided in each unit to apply ringing onto the line. Signal detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook signaling. Two codecs are provided for performing Analog/Digital (A/D) and Digital/Analog (D/A) conversion of analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals.
PAGE 163
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 163 of 906 — firmware version — self-test status — programmed configuration status • receipt and implementation of card configuration: — programming of the codecs — enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card — programming of input/output interface control circuits for administration of line interface unit operation — maintenance diagnostics — transmission loss levels Card LAN interface Maintenance data is exchanged with the CPU over a dedicated
PAGE 164
Page 164 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card See Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for LD 10 service change instructions. Table 63 OPS analog line card configuration Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS) Class of service ONS OPS Loop resistance 0 - 460 ohm 0 - 2300 ohm Jumper strap settingb Both JX. 0 and JX 1 off Both JX. 0 and JX. 1 off Both JX. 0 and JX. 1 on Loop loss dBc 0-1.5 >1.5-2. 5 >2.5-3. 0 0-1.5 >1.5-2. 5 >2.5-4.
PAGE 165
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 165 of 906 Port-to-port loss configuration The loss plan for the NT1R20 OPS analog line card determines port-to-port loss for connections between an OPS analog line card unit (port) and other ports. The transmission properties of each line unit are characterized by the OPS or ONS class of service assigned in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10.
PAGE 166
Page 166 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Analog line interface Table 64 lists the electrical characteristics of NT1R20 OPS analog line card line interface units.
PAGE 167
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 167 of 906 Power requirements Table 65 shows the maximum power consumed by the card from each system power supply. Table 65 OPS analog line card – power requirements Voltage Tolerance Current (max.) ±15.0 V dc ± 5% 150 mA +8.5 V dc ± 2% 200 mA +5.0 V dc ± 5% 100 mA –48.
PAGE 168
Page 168 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Table 66 OPS analog line card – ringer limitations (Part 2 of 2) OPS Loop Range Maximum Number of Ringers (REN) 0 – 10 ohms 3 > 10 – 900 ohms 2 > 900 – 2300 ohms 1 Environmental specifications Table 67 shows the environmental specifications of the OPS analog line card.
PAGE 169
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 169 of 906 Incoming calls Incoming calls to a telephone connected to the NT1R20 OPS analog line card originate from stations that can be local (served by the PBX) or remote (served through the public switched telephone network). The alerting signal to telephones is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing.
PAGE 170
Page 170 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Table 68 Call connection sequence—near-end station receiving call (Part 2 of 2) Signal / Direction Far-end / Near-end State Remarks Far end station hangs up first High resistance loop If the far-end hangs-up first, the system detects disconnect signalling from the trunk. The person at the near-end recognizes the end of the call and hangs-up.
PAGE 171
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 171 of 906 Table 69 Call connection sequence—near-end station receiving call (Part 2 of 2) State Signal / Direction Far-end / Near-end Outpulsing Addressing signals Remarks Near-end station dials number (loop pulsing or DTMF tones). The system detects start of dialing and remove dial tone. Ringback (or busy) Two-way voice connection The system decodes addressing, route calls, and supply ringback tone to near-end station if far-end is on-hook.
PAGE 172
Page 172 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Connector pin assignments The OPS analog line card brings the eight analog telephone lines to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables.
PAGE 173
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 173 of 906 Figure 23 OPS analog line card – typical cross connection example System Cross-connect OPS or ONS telephone connections NT8D37 IPE Module NT1R20 Off-premise Station Line Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3 Slot 0 Module I/O Panel Connector A MDF (W-BL) 0T 26 (BL-W) 0R 1 (W-O) 27 (O-W) 2 (W-G) 1T 28 1R 3 (G-W) (W-BR) 29 (BR-W) 4 2T 30 (W-S) 2R 5 (S-W) (R-BL) 31 (BL-R) 6 Tip Ring NC Tip Ring NC Tip Ring NC Part of 25-pair cable Unit 7
PAGE 174
Page 174 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Configuring the OPS analog line card The line type, terminating impedance, and balance network configuration for each unit on the card is selected by software service change entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card. Jumper strap settings Each line interface unit on the card is equipped with two jumper blocks that are used to select the proper loop current depending upon loop length. See Table 71.
PAGE 175
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 175 of 906 Table 71 OPS analog line card – configuration (Part 2 of 2) Application On-premise station (ONS) Gain treatment (Note 5) Off-premise station (OPS) No Yes Note 1: Configured in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. Note 2: The maximum signaling range supported by the OPS analog line card is 2300 ohms. Note 3: Loss of untreated (no gain devices) metallic line facility.
PAGE 176
Page 176 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card J4.0 J4.1 J6.0 J6.1 J7.0 J7.1 J5.0 J5.1 J2.0 J2.1 J0.0 J0.1 J1.0 J1.1 J3.0 J3.1 Figure 24 OPS analog line card – jumper block locations 553-6191 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 177
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 177 of 906 local office, or through a distant office. The line is not switched at these offices; however, depending on the facilities used, the local office serving the OPS station can provide line functions such as battery and ringing. Facilities are generally provided by the local exchange carrier (usually, OPS pairs are in the same cable as the PBX-CO trunks). The traditional OPS scenario configuration is shown in Figure 25 on page 178.
PAGE 178
Page 178 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Figure 25 Traditional OPS application configuration System OPS analog line card port CO trunk card port 4.5 dB maximum 0–3.5 dB Local CO OPS line facility Public Network Distant CO Non-switched thru connections OPS termination 7.0 dB total maximum 553-AAA1118 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 179
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 179 of 906 Other applications The operating range and built-in protection provisions of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card make it suitable for applications which are variants on the traditional configuration shown in Figure 25 on page 178. Examples of such applications are: • a PBX in a central building serving stations in other buildings in the vicinity, such as in an industrial park, often called a campus environment.
PAGE 180
Page 180 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Port-to-port loss Loss is inserted between OPS analog line card ports and other ports in accordance with the loss plan. This plan determines the port-to-port loss for each call. When a port is configured for CLS OPS, loss is programmed into the OPS analog line card on a call-by-call basis. When configured for CLS ONS, an OPS analog line card port is programmed to a value that is fixed for all calls.
PAGE 181
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card Page 181 of 906 The overall range achievable on an OPS line facility is limited by the signaling range (2300 ohms loop including telephone resistance). The signaling range is unaffected by gain treatment; thus, gain treatment can be used to extend the voice range to the limit of the signaling range. For example, on 26 AWG wire, the signaling range of 2300 ohms corresponds to an untreated metallic loop loss of 15 dB. Gain treatment (such as a VFR) with 10.
PAGE 182
Page 182 of 906 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card OPS line terminations with loudness characteristics designed for other applications can also impact transmission performance. For example, wireless portables loudness characteristics are selected for connections to switching systems for wireless communication systems; if used in an OPS arrangement without consideration for these characteristics, the result could be a significant deviation from optimum loudness performance.
PAGE 183
192 Page 183 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Front panel connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 184
Page 184 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card The CP PIV front panel is equipped with an EMC gasket and two ejector/ injector handles. A reset button and two double LED packages (four LEDs in total) are placed at the front panel as well.
PAGE 185
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Page 185 of 906 Figure 26 CP PIV card (front) Lan 1 COM 1 Lan 2 COM 2 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 186
Page 186 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Figure 27 CP PIV card (side) 512 MBytes DDR memory Rear Fixed Media CPU Drive (FMD) Removable Media Drive (RMD) Front Functional description The card employs an Intel Pentium Processor as the central processing unit. The internal core clock frequency reaches from 600MHz to1.1GHz. The processor is manufactured in 0.
PAGE 187
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Page 187 of 906 double pumped address bus (addresses running at 2*100 MHz = 200 MHz) is 32 bit wide supporting an address range of up to 4 GBytes. The processor voltage specification is compliant with IMVP IV specification. Memory CP PIV memory uses DDR SDRAM technology. The CP PIV provides a maximum of two GBytes using two vertical DIMM sockets to install off-the-shelf DIMM modules. CP PIV only supports DDR SDRAM DIMM memory with a supply voltage of +2.5V.
PAGE 188
Page 188 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Table 72 COM1 and COM2 pin assignments 553-3001-211 4 DTR 5 GND 6 DSR 7 RTS 8 CTS 9 RI Standard 3.
PAGE 189
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Page 189 of 906 USB port The physical interface for the USB port to the front panel is through a standard USB connector. The corresponding Pin details are shown in Table 73. Table 73 USB connector pin outs Pin number Pin name 1 USB VCC 2 USB- 3 USB+ 4 USB GND 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports The physical interface for the two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports to the front panel is through a stacked dual RJ 45 connector with magnetics and LEDs.
PAGE 190
Page 190 of 906 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Front panel LED indicators The CP PIV card has a total of five LEDS on the front panel which are 15 KV ESD protected and can be controlled via CPLD. Table 75 explains the function of each LED.
PAGE 191
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Page 191 of 906 ITP connector (25 PIN, Debug Only) Figure 28 ITP connector pin outs Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name P1 GND P2 GND P3 BPM0N P4 NC P5 BPM1N P6 RESETN P7 BPM2N P8 GND P9 BPM3N P10 TDI P11 BPM4N P12 TMS P13 BPM5N P14 TRSTN P15 ITP_CPURSTN P16 TCK P17 TCK P18 NC P19 CLK P20 GND P21 CLKN P22 PWR P23 BPM5N P24 TDO P25 GND Post 80 Debug LEDs (Optional) CP PIV has post 80 debug LEDs to assist in debugging the board an
PAGE 192
Page 192 of 906 553-3001-211 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card Standard 3.
PAGE 193
248 Page 193 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Electrical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 194
Page 194 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards mail systems, channel banks containing FXS cards, and key systems such as the Nortel Norstar. The lineside T1 card differs from trunk T1 cards in that it supports terminal equipment features such as hookflash, transfer, hold, and conference. This card occupies two card slots in the main or expansion cabinets.
PAGE 195
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 195 of 906 Figure 29 Lineside T1 card faceplate Card lock latch LTI Card status LED S This symbol indicates that field-selectable switch settings are located on this card Warning LEDs YEL ALM RED ALM MAINT NT5D11 Rlse 0x Card lock latch 553-6478 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 196
Page 196 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 76. Table 76 NT5D14AA Lineside T1 faceplate LEDs LED State Definition STATUS On (Red) The NT5D14AA card either failed its self-test or it hasn’t yet been configured in software. Off The card is in an active state. On (Red) A red alarm has been detected from the T1 link.
PAGE 197
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 197 of 906 Note: Note: The STATUS LED indicates the enabled/disabled status of both card slots of the lineside T1 card simultaneously. To properly enable the card, both the motherboard and the daughterboard slots must be enabled. The STATUS LED will turn off as soon as either one of the lineside T1 card slots have been enabled. No LED operation will be observed when the second card slot is enabled.
PAGE 198
Page 198 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards “Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software” on page 225 for information on T1 link maintenance. If the card detects that tests are being run or that alarms have been disabled through the MMI, this LED will light and will remain lit until these conditions are no longer detected, then it will turn off. Functional description Figure 30 shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the lineside T1 card.
PAGE 199
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 199 of 906 The lineside T1 card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective all-digital connection between T1 compatible terminal equipment (such as voice mail systems, voice response units, and trading turrets) and the system. The terminal equipment is assured access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone type line functionality such as hook flash, SPRE codes and ringback tones generated from the switch.
PAGE 200
Page 200 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Card interfaces The lineside T1 card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops through the DS-30X Interfaces circuits and maintenance data over the card LAN link. T1 interface circuit The lineside T1 card contains one T1 line interface circuit which provides 24 individually configurable voice interfaces to one T1 link in 24 different time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.
PAGE 201
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 201 of 906 Microcontrollers The lineside T1 card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
PAGE 202
Page 202 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Man-Machine Interface The lineside T1 card provides an optional Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that is primarily used for T1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis. The MMI provides alarm notification, T1 link performance reporting and fault isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the I/O panel to a terminal or modem.
PAGE 203
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 203 of 906 Power requirements The lineside T1 card requires +15 V, –15 V, and +5 V from the backplane. One NT8D06 IPE Power Supply AC or NT6D40 IPE Power Supply DC can supply power to a maximum of eight lineside T1 cards. See Table 78. Table 78 Lineside T1 card – power required Voltage Current (max.) + 5.0 V dc 1.6 Amp +15.0 V dc 150 mA. –15.0 V dc 150 mA.
PAGE 204
Page 204 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Environmental specifications Table 79 lists the environmental specifications of the lineside T1 card.
PAGE 205
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 205 of 906 Dip switch settings Begin the installation and configuration of the lineside T1 card by selecting the proper dip switch settings for the environment. The lineside T1 card contains two dip switches, each containing eight switch positions. They are located in the upper right corner of the motherboard circuit card as shown in Figure 31 on page 206. The configuration for these switches are shown in Tables 80 through 83.
PAGE 206
Page 206 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards S2 S1 Figure 31 Lineside T1 card – T1 protocol dip switch locations dip switches 553-6479 LD 97 for type: XPE. However, this is not mandatory, and, since the dip switch is limited to 16, this will not always be possible. 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 207
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 207 of 906 T1 framing The lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment either in D4 or ESF framing mode. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of framing the CPE or CSU equipment supports. T1 coding The lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment using either AMI or B8ZS coding.
PAGE 208
Page 208 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards cabled directly into the MMI terminal or modem; select the slave setting if this card is cabled to another lineside T1 card in a daisy chain. Tables 80 through 83 describes the proper dip switch settings for each type of T1 link. After the card has been installed, the MMI displays the DIP switch settings the command Display Configuration is used.
PAGE 209
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 209 of 906 Table 81 Lineside T1 card – XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3 – 6) (Part 2 of 2) XPEC Address S1 Switch Position 3 S1 Switch Position 4 S1 Switch Position 5 S1 Switch Position 6 05 Off On Off On 06 Off On On Off 07 Off On On On 08 On Off Off Off 09 On Off Off On 10 On Off On Off 11 On Off On On 12 On On Off Off 13 On On Off On 14 On On On Off 15 On On On On Table
PAGE 210
Page 210 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 82 Lineside T1 card – T1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings (Part 2 of 2) Dip Switch Number Characteristic Selection 7 Daisy-chaining to MMI On = Yes Off = No 8 MMI Master or Slave On = Master Off = Slave Table 83 Lineside T1 card – CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 – 5) Distance S2 Switch Position 3 S2 Switch Position 4 S2 Switch Position 5 0–133 On Off Off 134–266 Off On On 267–399 Off
PAGE 211
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 211 of 906 Certain vintage levels have dedicated 25-pair I/O connectors only for card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12. These vintage levels are cabled with only 16 pairs of wires from each card slot to the I/O panel. Some of the 25-pair I/O connectors are split between adjacent card slots. Other vintage levels cable each card slot to the I/O panel using a unique, 24-pair connector on the I/O panel.
PAGE 212
Page 212 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Vintage levels cabling 16 ports For modules with vintage levels that cabled 16 ports to the I/O panel, the lineside T1 card can be installed into the following card slot pairs: Available: Motherboard/Daughterboard 0 and 1 1 and 2 4 and 5 7 and 8 8 and 9 9 and 10 12 and 13 13 and 14 The lineside T1 card cannot be installed into the following card slot pairs: Restricted: Motherboard/Daughterboard 2 and 3 3 and 4 6 and 7 10 and 11 11 and 12 14
PAGE 213
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 213 of 906 Cabling the lineside T1 card After configuring the dip switches and installing the lineside T1 card into the selected card slots, the lineside T1 card is ready to be cabled to the CPE or CSU equipment. Connections can also be made to the MMI terminal or modem (optional), an external alarm (optional), and other lineside T1 cards for daisy-chain use of the MMI terminal (optional).
PAGE 214
Page 214 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 32 Lineside T1 card – connection using the NT5D13AA lineside T1 cable System NT8D37 IPE Module Module I/O panel NT8D81 Tip & Ring Cable Slot 0 NT5D13 Maintenance Interface Cable A P1 1 1 26 2 26 2 27 3 27 3 28 4 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 62A 62B 9 34 9 34 69A 69B 16 41 16 41 12A 12B 13A 13B 14A Line Side T-1 Card (bl-w) (w-bl) (o-w) (w-o) (g-w) (w-g) 14B (br-w) 15A (w-br) 15B (s-w) 16A (w
PAGE 215
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 215 of 906 Procedure 11 Connecting to the MDF To make the connections at the MDF, follow this procedure: 1 Punch down the first eight pairs of a standard telco 25-pair female-connectorized cross-connect tail starting with the first tip and ring pair of the lineside T1 motherboard card slot on the cross-connect side of the MDF terminals.
PAGE 216
Page 216 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 85 Lineside T1 card – backplane pinouts (Part 2 of 2) 553-3001-211 Backplane Connector Pin I/O Panel Connector Pin Signal 13A 2 T1 Tip, Transmit Data 13B 27 T1 Ring, Transmit Data 14A 3 Alarm out, Normally open 14B 28 Alarm out, Common 15A 4 Alarm out, Normally closed 15B 29 No Connection 16A 5 No Connection 16B 30 Away from MMI terminal, Receive Data 17A 6 Away from MMI terminal, Transmit Data 17B 31 Towa
PAGE 217
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 217 of 906 Table 86 shows the pin assignments when using the NT5D13AA lineside T1 I/O cable.
PAGE 218
Page 218 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 86 Lineside T1 card – NT5D13AA connector pinouts (Part 2 of 2) I/O panel connector pin Lead designations NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O connector pin 33 Ground 5 8 Control 1 7 32 Control 2 9 30 Away from MMI terminal Transmit Data 3 6 Away from MMI terminal Receive Data 2 Lineside T1 cable connector to external equipment DB9 female away from MMI (P4) Wired as DTE Data is transmitted on pin 2 (TXD) and received on pin 3 (RXD)
PAGE 219
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 219 of 906 One of the ways it can report information is through this external alarm connection. If connected, the lineside T1 card’s microprocessor activates the external alarm hardware if it detects certain T1 link problems that it has classified as alarm levels 1 or 2. See “Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software” on page 225 for a detailed description of alarm levels and configuration.
PAGE 220
Page 220 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Procedure 12 Connecting two or more lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal Follow this procedure for connecting two or more lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal: 1 Cable the DB9 male connector labeled “P5” (towards MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem.
PAGE 221
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 221 of 906 Figure 33 Lineside T1 card – connecting two or more cards to the MMI MMI terminal LTI Tx & Rx (tip & ring) Toward MMI NT5D13 Maintenance Interface Cable (typ) P2 Alarm out No connection Away from MMI P3 P5 P4 P1 NT8D81 Tip & Ring Cable (typ) LTI card no. 1 I/O panel on rear of IPE module LTI card no. 2 LTI card no.
PAGE 222
Page 222 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Terminal configuration For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the lineside T1 card, the interface characteristics must be configured to the following: • Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, depending on the setting of switch position 1 of Switch 1 • Character width – 8 bits • Parity bit – none • Stop bits – one • Software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off Software configuration Although much of the architecture and many of the features of th
PAGE 223
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 223 of 906 cross-referenced to the corresponding card unit number. This mapping is shown in Table 87.
PAGE 224
Page 224 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 87 DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping (Part 2 of 2) Item TN T1 Channel Number Daughterboard 4 21 Daughterboard 5 22 Daughterboard 6 23 Daughterboard 7 24 Disconnect supervision The lineside T1 card supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening the tip side toward the terminal equipment upon the system's detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call.
PAGE 225
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 225 of 906 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software Description The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) supplies a maintenance interface to a terminal that provides T1 link diagnostics and historical information. See “Installation and configuration” on page 204 for instructions on how to install the cabling and configure the terminal for the MMI. This section describes the features of MMI and explains how to configure and use the MMI firmware.
PAGE 226
Page 226 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Two levels of alarm severity exist for bit errors and frame slip errors. For these conditions, two different threshold and duration configurations are established.
PAGE 227
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards • bursty seconds • unavailable seconds • framer slip seconds • loss of frame seconds Page 227 of 906 It retains the T1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24 hours. Descriptions of each of these performance error counters, and instructions on how to report on them and clear them can be found in “Performance counters and reporting” on page 239.
PAGE 228
Page 228 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards A space is inserted between the login command (L), the shelf address, and the card slot address. The MMI then prompts for a password. The password is “LTILINK”, and it must be typed all in capital letters.
PAGE 229
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 229 of 906 If ? is typed, the MMI will list the above commands along with an explanation of their usage A screen similar to the following will appear. The help screen can also appear by typing H, or HELP.
PAGE 230
Page 230 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Table 88 MMI commands and command sets (Part 2 of 3) Command CE D A [P] DC Description Clear Error Clears the error counter for the T1. Display Alarms [Pause] Displays the alarm log – a list of the most recent 100 alarms along with time and date stamps.
PAGE 231
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 231 of 906 Table 88 MMI commands and command sets (Part 3 of 3) Command Description Q Quit Logs the terminal user out. If multiple lineside T1 cards share a single terminal, logout after using the MMI. Because of the shared daisy-chained link, if a lineside T1 card is logged in, it occupies the bus and no other lineside T1 cards are able to notify the MMI of alarms.
PAGE 232
Page 232 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Configuring parameters The MMI has been designed with default settings so that no configuration is necessary. However, it can be configured to suit a specific environment. Set Time Before configuring the MMI, login to the system and enter the current time. Do this by typing in the Set Time (S T) command set. The MMI will then display the time it has registered. Enter a new time or press “Enter” to leave it unchanged.
PAGE 233
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 233 of 906 When the Set Alarm command is used, a prompt appears to configure the threshold level and duration period for alarm levels 1 and 2. The threshold value indicates the number of bit errors detected per second that is necessary to activate the alarm. The T1 link processes at a rate of approximately 1.5 mb/s. The threshold value can be set between 3 and 9 and can be different for each alarm level.
PAGE 234
Page 234 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Clearing” option has been set. Otherwise, the alarm will continue until the command set Clear Alarm (C A) has been entered.
PAGE 235
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 235 of 906 When entering the Set Alarm command set, the MMI will scroll through the previously described series of alarm options. These options are displayed along with their current value. Enter a new value or press Enter to retain the current value. Table 90 outlines the options available in the Set Alarm function.
PAGE 236
Page 236 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards The “Disable Self-Clearing” option causes the system to continue the alarm condition until the Clear Alarm (C A) command set is entered. Line processing and the yellow alarm indication to the CPE is terminated as soon as the alarm condition clears, even if “Disable Self-Clearing” is set. Display Configuration The Display Configuration (D C) command set displays the various configuration settings established for the lineside T1 card.
PAGE 237
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 237 of 906 Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions can be found in “Configuring parameters” on page 232. Bit errors may activate either a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaining conditions, when detected, will always cause the system to activate a level 2 alarm. An out of frame condition will be declared if two out of four frame bits are in error.
PAGE 238
Page 238 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards mode, yellow alarms can be sent and the lineside T1 card can enter line processing mode. Clear Alarm The Clear Alarm (C A) command set will clear all activity initiated by an alarm: the external alarm hardware will be deactivated (the contact normally open will be reopened), the LED light will go out, an entry will be made in the alarm log of the date and time the alarm was cleared, and line processing will cease (for alarm level 2 only).
PAGE 239
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 239 of 906 of the lineside T1 card. Entering the Display Status (D S) command set will cause a screen similar to the following to appear: LTI S/N Software Version 1.
PAGE 240
Page 240 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards • Loss of frame seconds – loss of frame or loss of signal for three consecutive seconds. • Framer slip seconds – one ore more frame slips in a second. The MMI also maintains an overall error counter that is a sum of all the errors counted for the five performance criteria listed above. The error counter can only be cleared by entering the “Clear Error” command. It will stop counting at 65,000.
PAGE 241
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 241 of 906 Display History Enter the Display History (D H) command set to display performance counters for each hour for the past 24 hours.
PAGE 242
Page 242 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Tests can be performed once (for 1 through 98 minutes), or continuously (selected by entering 99 minutes) until a “Stop Test” command is entered. Tests continue for the duration specified even if a failure occurs, and terminate at the end of the time period or when a “Stop Test” command is issued. Only a “Stop Test” command will stop a test with a duration selection of 99.
PAGE 243
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 243 of 906 Figure 34 MMI local loopback test System Line side T-1 interface card Common Equipment T-1 link External T-1 link network Customer premise equipment (CPE) 553-AAA1120 Test 2, external loopback, assumes an external loopback is applied to the T1 link. Test data is generated and received by the lineside T1 card on all timeslots.
PAGE 244
Page 244 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards in tandem. Figure 36 demonstrates how the signaling is looped back toward the CPE equipment.
PAGE 245
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 245 of 906 Figure 37 Lineside T1 interface connection to IPE System T1 Line-side T1 interface LTI Trunks Public network Third-party peripheral equipment with T1 interface 553-AAA1123 For example, the lineside T1 card can be used to connect the system to a T1-compatible VRU. An example of this type of equipment is Nortel Open IVR system. In this way, the system can send a call to the VRU.
PAGE 246
Page 246 of 906 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Figure 38 Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application System Channel bank LTI T1 Public network T1 553-AAA1124 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 247
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Page 247 of 906 Similarly, the lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 39. In this case, channel banks would not be required if the Norstar system is equipped with a T1 interface.
PAGE 248
Page 248 of 906 553-3001-211 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards Standard 3.
PAGE 249
312 Page 249 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Electrical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 250
Page 250 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. The LEI also comes equipped with a Man-Machine Interface (MMI) maintenance program, which provides diagnostic information regarding the status of the E1 link.
PAGE 251
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 251 of 906 motherboard (31.75 by 25.40 cm (12.5 by 10 in) and a daughterboard (5.08 by 15.24 cm (2 by 6 in). Card connections The LEI uses the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cable to connect from the IPE backplane to the 25-pair Amphenol connector on the IPE Input/Output (I/O) panel. The I/O panel connector connects to a E1 line, external alarm and an MMI terminal or modem, using the NT5D35 or NT5D36 lineside I/O cable available from Nortel.
PAGE 252
Page 252 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 40 NT5D33AB LEI card – faceplate 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 253
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 253 of 906 Figure 41 NT5D34AB LEI card – faceplate Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 254
Page 254 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards The LEDs give status indications on the operations as described in Table 92. Table 92 LEI card LED operation LED Operation Status Line card Red alarm E1 near end Yellow alarm E1 far end Maint Maintenance The STATUS LED indicates if the LEI has successfully passed its self test, and therefore, if it is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs.
PAGE 255
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 255 of 906 condition. Depending on how the Man Machine Interface (MMI) is configured, this LED will remain lit until one the following actions occur: • If the “Self-Clearing” function is enabled in the MMI, the LED will clear the alarm when the alarm condition is no longer detected. This is the factory default configuration.
PAGE 256
Page 256 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 42 LEI card – block diagram 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 257
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 257 of 906 Overview The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective, all-digital connection between E1 compatible terminal equipment (such as voice mail systems, voice response units, trading turrets, etc.) and the system. In this application, the terminal equipment can be assured access to analog (500/ 2500-type) telephone line functionality such as hook flash, SPRE codes and ringback tones.
PAGE 258
Page 258 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards E1 interface circuit The LEI contains one E1 line-interface circuit which provides 30 individually configurable voice interfaces to one E1 link in 30 different time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X transmit signaling bitstreams from the DS-30X network loop and converts it into 2.048 mHz E1 transmit signaling bitstreams onto the E1 link.
PAGE 259
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 259 of 906 — card identification (card type, vintage, serial number) — firmware version — self-test results — programmed unit parameter status • receipt and implementation of card configuration — control of the E1 line interface — enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card — programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of channel operation — maintenance diagnostics • interface with the line card circuit — converts on/off
PAGE 260
Page 260 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards provides alarm notification, E1 link performance reporting, and fault isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the I/O panel to a terminal or modem. Multiple cards (up to 64) can be served through one MMI terminal or modem by linking the LEIs through a daisy chain. The MMI is an optional feature, since all E1 configuration settings are performed through dip switch settings or preconfigured factory default settings.
PAGE 261
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 2 Page 261 of 906 Redirecting Line ID Presentation (RLIP) When an incoming call over the TDM/IP network or a CS 1000 originated call which has undergone redirections is directed towards the CAS+ compliant system, Redirecting Line ID can be provided over the CAS+ interface. This is assuming that the incoming call has the Redirecting Line ID without any presentation restrictions.
PAGE 262
Page 262 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Power requirements Table 94 shows the voltage and maximum current that the LEI requires from the backplane. One NT8D06 IPE Power Supply AC or NT6D40 IPE Supply DC can supply power to a maximum of eight LEIs. Table 94 LEI card – power required Voltage Max. Current 5.0 V dc 1.6 Amp +15.0 V dc 150 mA -15.
PAGE 263
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 263 of 906 Table 95 LEI card – environmental specifications (Part 2 of 2) Parameter Specifications Storage temperature –50° to + 70° C (–58° to 158° F), ambient Storage humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Installation and Configuration Installation and configuration of the LEI consists of six basic steps: 1 Configure the dip switches on the LEI for the call environment. 2 Install the LEI into the selected card slots.
PAGE 264
Page 264 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards of the motherboard circuit card as shown in Figure 44 on page 266. The settings for these switches are shown in Table 96 on page 267 through Table 99 on page 270. When the LEI card is oriented as shown in Figure 44 on page 266, the dip switches are ON when they are up, and OFF when they are down.
PAGE 265
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 265 of 906 E1 Coding The LEI is capable of interfacing with LTU equipment using either AMI or HDB3 coding. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on the type of coding the LTU equipment supports.
PAGE 266
Page 266 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 44 LEI card – E1 protocol dip switch locations C31 C75 U76 C64 U 12 U59 Y2 U58 ON C63 U46 OFF C73 1 C32 C62 8 1 dip switches 8 S1 U92 S2 C30 U11 RP15 C21 U75 U 57 U91 C33 U 56 U10 U45 D6D7 R14 U23 C60 C61 R13 T3 C59 U9 C72 U44 C20 C9 C 10 U 42 C 19 U89 U43 U90 U55 U74 D4D5 R 12 C22 RP14 Y1 C18 R P17 U88 U40 C29 U41 C58 C57 U87 U 22 C28 C56 U86 U 73 U 39 U54 C54 C16 RP13 U85 U 72
PAGE 267
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 267 of 906 Line supervision on E1 failure This setting determines in what state all 30 LEI ports will appear to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 in case of E1 failure. Ports can appear as either in the “on-hook” or “off-hook” states on E1 failure. Note: All idle LEI lines will go off-hook and seize a Digitone Receiver when the off-hook line processing is invoked on E1 failure.
PAGE 268
Page 268 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Table 96 LEI card – Switch #1 dip switch settings (Part 2 of 2) Characteristic IPE Shelf address for LEI Card type for ringer allocation E1 signaling Selection Switch Position Switch Setting Factory Default See Table 98 3 See Table 98 OFF 4 OFF 5 OFF 6 OFF XTI = 19 XMLC = 18 7 7 ON OFF OFF See Table 97 8 OFF OFF When dip switch #1, positions 2 and 8 are set to “Table,” AB Bits are configured by the user through the Set
PAGE 269
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 269 of 906 Table 98 LEI card – XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6) XPEC Address S1 Switch Position 3 S1 Switch Position 4 S1 Switch Position 5 S1 Switch Position 6 00 OFF OFF OFF OFF 01 ON OFF OFF OFF 02 OFF ON OFF OFF 03 ON ON OFF OFF 04 OFF OFF ON OFF 05 ON OFF ON OFF 06 OFF ON ON OFF 07 ON ON ON OFF 08 OFF OFF OFF ON 09 ON OFF OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON ON OFF ON
PAGE 270
Page 270 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards When setting E1 Switch 2 dip switch settings, there are differences between vintages. For NT5D33AB or NT5D34AB cards, use Table 99. For NT5D33AC or NT5D34AC cards, use Table 99 on page 270.
PAGE 271
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 271 of 906 Table 100 ELEI card – E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings Characteristic Selection E1 framing CRC-4 Disabled Switch Position Switch Setting Factory Default 1 ON ON CRC-4 Enabled E1 coding AMI OFF 2 HDB3 ON OFF OFF NOT USED leave ON 3 ON ON NOT USED leave ON 4 OFF OFF Mode LEI Mode 5 OFF OFF ELEI Mode Line processing on E1 link failure On-hook Daisy-chaining to MMI YES ON 6 Off-hook Master OFF OFF 7 NO
PAGE 272
Page 272 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards of module or cabinet. In all other modules or cabinets where the conditions listed below do not exist, the LEI will work in any two adjacent card slots: • In the NTAK12 Small Remote IPE Expansion Cabinet only card slots 10-15 are available.
PAGE 273
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 273 of 906 Vintage levels cabling 30 ports: For modules with vintage levels that cabled 30 ports to the I/O panel, the LEI can be installed in any pair of card slots 0-15.
PAGE 274
Page 274 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Alternatively, all LEI connections can be made at the main distribution frame instead of connecting the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA LEI card external I/O cable at the I/O panel. This eliminates these card slot restrictions.
PAGE 275
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 275 of 906 This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into the I/O panel.
PAGE 276
Page 276 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Table 102 LEI card – LEI backplane and I/O panel pinouts (Part 2 of 2) Backplane connector pin I/O Panel connector pin 17A 6 Away from MMI terminal, transmit data 17B 31 Toward MMI terminal, transmit data 18A 7 Toward MMI terminal, receive data 18B 32 Daisy chain control 2 19A 8 Daisy chain control 1 19B 33 Ground Signal Table 103 shows the pin assignments from the I/O panel relating to the pin assignments of the lineside E1
PAGE 277
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 277 of 906 Table 103 LEI card – lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts (Part 2 of 2) I/O Panel Connector Pin Lead Designations LEI Connect or Pin 4 Alarm out (normally closed) 3 7 Toward MMI terminal, receive data 2 31 Toward MMI terminal, transmit data 3 33 Ground 5 8 Control 1 7 32 Control 2 9 33 Ground 5 8 Control 1 7 32 Control 2 9 30 Away from MMI terminal, transmit data 3 6 Away from MMI terminal, receive data 2 LEI Cable
PAGE 278
Page 278 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards CPE at the far-end will likewise have transmit and receive wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the far-end of the carrier facility. For 75 ohm coaxial installations, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11 though an adapter and out two coaxial connectors Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive). Tx is the LEI output, and Rx is the LEI input from the E1 stream.
PAGE 279
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 279 of 906 128 LEIs can be linked, located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves, to one MMI terminal using the daisy chain approach. If only one LEI is will be installed, cable from the DB9 male connector labeled “P5” (toward MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem.
PAGE 280
Page 280 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 45 LEI card – connecting two or more cards to the MMI Terminal configuration For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the LEI, the interface characteristics must be set to: 553-3001-211 • speed – 1200 or 2400 bps • character width – 7 bits • parity bit – mark Standard 3.
PAGE 281
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards • stop bits – one • software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off Page 281 of 906 Software Configuration Although much of the architecture and many features of the LEI card are different from the analog line card, the LEI has been designed to emulate an analog line card to the CS 1000 Release 4.5 software. Because of this, the LEI software configuration is the same as for two adjacent analog line cards.
PAGE 282
Page 282 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Table 104 Card unit number to E1 channel mapping (Part 2 of 3) 553-3001-211 Item TN E1 Channel Number Motherboard 7 8 Motherboard 8 9 Motherboard 9 10 Motherboard 10 11 Motherboard 11 12 Motherboard 12 13 Motherboard 13 14 Motherboard 14 15 Motherboard 15 17 Daughterboard 0 18 Daughterboard 1 19 Daughterboard 2 20 Daughterboard 3 21 Daughterboard 4 22 Daughterboard 5 23 Daughterboard 6 24 Daug
PAGE 283
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 283 of 906 Table 104 Card unit number to E1 channel mapping (Part 3 of 3) Item TN E1 Channel Number Daughterboard 12 30 Daughterboard 13 31 Disconnect supervision The LEI supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening the tip side toward the terminal equipment upon the system’s detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The Supervised Analog Line feature (SAL) must be configured in LD 10 for each LEI port.
PAGE 284
Page 284 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software Description The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) provides E1-link diagnostics and historical information for the LEI system. See “Installation and Configuration” on page 263 for instructions on how to install the cabling and configure the terminal for the MMI.
PAGE 285
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 285 of 906 Two levels of alarm severity exist for bit errors. Different threshold and duration settings must be established for each level.
PAGE 286
Page 286 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards • framer-slip seconds • loss-of-frame seconds The MMI retains E1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each hour for the previous 24. For descriptions of these performance error counters and instructions on how to create a report on them and clear them, see “Performance counters and reporting” on page 304.
PAGE 287
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 287 of 906 LEI::ss cc> (for multi-card installations, where ss represents the shelf address and cc represents the card slot address.) Basic commands MMI commands can now be executed. The seven basic commands are: • Help • Alarm • Clear • Display • Set • Test • Quit Type ? to list these commands, along with an explanation of their usage. A screen similar to Figure 46 will appear.
PAGE 288
Page 288 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Each of these commands can be executed by entering the first letter of the command or by entering the entire command. Commands with more than one word are entered by entering the first letter of the first word, a space, and the first letter of the second word or by entering the entire command. Table 105 shows all possible MMI commands in alphabetical order. These commands are also described later in this section.
PAGE 289
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 289 of 906 Table 105 MMI commands and command sets (Part 2 of 2) Command Description D S(P) Display Status. Displays carrier status, including alarm state and, if active, alarm level. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by typing any other key.) H or ? Help. Displays the Help screen. L Login. Logs into the MMI terminal in a single-LEI system. Lxx Login.
PAGE 290
Page 290 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Configuring parameters The MMI has been designed with default settings so that no configuration is necessary. However, it can be configured based on the call environment. Set Time Before beginning to configure the MMI, login to the system and verify the current time. Do this by entering the Set Time (S T) command. The MMI displays the time it has registered. Enter a new time or hit Enter to leave it unchanged.
PAGE 291
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 291 of 906 — an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal — the LEI card enters line-conditioning mode — a yellow alarm message is sent to the CPE/LTU Line processing sends the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 either all “on-hook” or all “off-hook” signals, depending on the dip switch setting of the card. See Table 99 on page 270.
PAGE 292
Page 292 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Table 106 E1 bit error rate threshold settings (Part 2 of 2) Alarm threshold bit errors per second in power of 10 Threshold to set alarm Allowable Duration Periods 10-8 2.0/100 seconds 100-3600 seconds 10-9 2.0/1000 seconds 1000-3600 seconds The duration value is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3,600 seconds (1 hour). This duration value indicates how long the alarm condition must last before an alarm will be declared.
PAGE 293
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 293 of 906 An alarm condition is not automatically cleared until the system no longer detects the respective bit error threshold during the corresponding duration period. For example, if AL1 threshold of 6 (representing 10-6) is specified, and a duration period of 100 seconds is specified, an alarm is activated if more than 200 bit errors occur in any 100 second period. As soon as the alarm is activated, the bit counter is reset to 0.
PAGE 294
Page 294 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Table 107 Set alarm options (Part 2 of 2) Option Description AL2 Threshold Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10-5. AL2 Duration Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10 seconds. Frame Slip Threshold Sets the allowable frame slips per time period (from 1 to 255) before alarm level 2 is activated.
PAGE 295
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 295 of 906 When the far-end terminates a call, Release 1 of LEI’s AB vintage sends a disconnect message to the terminal equipment and waits for the terminal equipment to go idle before going idle itself. A NO response to the S S command configures Release 2 (and later) boards to operate in this way. See Figure 47.
PAGE 296
Page 296 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 49 Set Mode (S M): screen LEI:>S M 1) Default 2) Table Hit to accept current value or type in a new one. Current Mode : 1 New Mode : Signaling Bits set to Default. LEI:> However, responding to this prompt with 2 selects “Table” and allows the user to set the A/B Bit Mode to whatever configuration the user chooses. If “Table” is selected, the individual table values will is prompted for.
PAGE 297
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 297 of 906 Figure 50 Set Mode (S M): Table screen Outgoing call SEIZE RECEIVE: Current: 0001 New: 111 Error: Note enough values specified. Enter either 2 or 4 values. Outgoing call SEIZE RECEIVE: Current: 0001 New: 11 Outgoing call SEIZE RECEIVE bits changed to: 1111 Outgoing call SEIZE ACK SEND enabled? (Y/N): N Outgoing call SEIZE ACK SEND is disabled. Outgoing call DIAL MAKE RECEIVE: Current: 1111 New: Outgoing call DIAL MAKE RECEIVE bits not changed.
PAGE 298
Page 298 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 51 Set Mode (S M): Table screen LEI:>S M 1) Default 2) Table Hit to accept current value or type in a new one. Current Mode : 1 New Mode : 2 Signaling Bits set to Table. Incoming and outgoing calls are in reference to the CPE. All ABCD bits are with respect to SENDing from LEI/M1 to CPE or RECEIVing from CPE to LEI/M1. Please enter new ABCD bits or hit to accept. You may enter 2 or 4 values.
PAGE 299
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 299 of 906 Incoming call Ringer ON SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that ringing voltage should be applied at the CPE. This value is required. Incoming call Ringer OFF SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that the ring cycle is in the off portion of the cadence. This value is required.
PAGE 300
Page 300 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Outgoing call DIAL BREAK RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE during the break part of the digit. This value is required. Outgoing call ANSWERED SEND – This is the value that the LEI will send to indicate that the far-end has answered the call. This value is required.
PAGE 301
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 301 of 906 Figure 52 Display Configuration (D C) screen LEI S/N 1103 Software Version 1.01 3/03/95 1:50 Alarms Enabled: YES Self Clearing Enabled: YES Alarm Level 1 threshold value: E-7 Threshold duration (in seconds): 10 Alarm Level 2 threshold value: E-5 Threshold duration (in seconds): 1 Frame slips alarm level threshold: 5 Threshold duration (in hours) 2 Current dip switch S1 settings (S1..
PAGE 302
Page 302 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards seconds, neither a loss of signal, out-of-frame condition, or blue alarm condition occurs. If a repeating device loses signal, it immediately begins sending an unframed signal of all ones to the far-end to indicate an alarm condition. This condition is called a blue alarm, or an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). If an AIS is detected for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared, and silence is sent on all receive timeslots.
PAGE 303
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 303 of 906 Figure 53 Display Alarm (D A) screen Alarm Log 2/03/99 1:48 Yellow alarm on E1 carrier 2/03/99 2:33 E1 carrier level 1 alarm 2/03/99 3:47 E1 carrier level 2 alarm 2/03/99 4:43 E1 carrier performance within thresholds 2/03/99 15:01 Log Cleared The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D A P. If there is more than one screen in the log, the MMI scrolls the log until the screen is full, then stops.
PAGE 304
Page 304 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 54 Display Status (D S) screen LEI S/N Software Version 1.
PAGE 305
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 305 of 906 • Loss-of-frame seconds are seconds in which loss-of-frame or loss-of-signal conditions have existed for three consecutive seconds. • Frame slip seconds are seconds in which one or more frame slips occur. The MMI also maintains an overall error counter which is the sum of all errors counted for the performance criteria listed above. The error counter can only be cleared by entering the Clear Error (C E) command. It stops counting at 65,000.
PAGE 306
Page 306 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by entering D P P. If more than one screen is to be displayed, the MMI scrolls until the screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen, press any key. The display shows one more screen, and stops again. This continues until the entire display has been shown.
PAGE 307
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 307 of 906 Testing The Test Carrier (T) command allows tests to be run on the LEI, the E1 link, or the CPE device. The three tests are designed to provide the capability to isolate faulty conditions in any of these three sources. See Table 108 on page 308 for additional information on these three test types. Enter the T command, and at the prompt, enter which of these three tests is to be initiated. The prompt is similar to Figure 57.
PAGE 308
Page 308 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Table 108 shows which test to run for the associated equipment. Table 108 MMI Tests Test number Equipment Tested Test Description 1 LEI Local loopback 2 E1 link, LEI, and E1 network External loopback 3 CPE device and E1 network Network loopback Test 1, local loopback, loops the E1 link signaling toward itself at the backplane connector. Test data is generated and received on all timeslots.
PAGE 309
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 309 of 906 Figure 60 MMI External loopback test System Line side E-1 E-1 link interface card Common Equipment External E-1 link network Customer premise equipment (CPE) 553-1161 Test 3, network loopback, loops the LEI's received E1 data back toward the CPE. No test data is generated or received by the LEI. If test 2 passes but test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is defective.
PAGE 310
Page 310 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Applications The LEI is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective connection between E1-compatible IPE and a CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 system or off-premise extensions over long distances.
PAGE 311
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Page 311 of 906 send a call to the VRU, and, because the LEI supports analog (500/2500-type) telephone functionality, the VRU is able to send the call back to the system for further handling. The LEI can also be used to provide off-premise extensions to remote locations, up to 500 miles from the system.
PAGE 312
Page 312 of 906 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards Figure 64 LEI connection to Norstar system LEI Norstar E1 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 313
318 Page 313 of 906 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Electrical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 314
Page 314 of 906 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) The CLASS modem card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided printed circuit board. The card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector. The faceplate of the CLASS modem card is equipped with a red LED that lights when the card is disabled. When the card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs.
PAGE 315
NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Page 315 of 906 Bell 202 standard. The transmission is implemented by the appropriate PCM equivalent of 1200 or 2200 Hz. Upon completion of transmitting the CND data, the CLASS Modem card sends a message to the system software to indicate successful transmission of the CND data. Eight modems can be associated with each module. Table 109 shows time slot mapping for the CLASS modem card.
PAGE 316
Page 316 of 906 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Table 109 Time slot mapping (Part 2 of 2) XCMC mapping of TNs 553-3001-211 TNs DS30X timeslot Modem units on the CLASS Modem card 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 04 05 06 07 16 17 18 19 16 17 18 19 module 2, 00 01 02 03 20 21 22 23 20 21 22 23 04 05 06 07 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27 module 3, 00 01 02 03 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 04 05 06 07 Standard 3.
PAGE 317
NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Page 317 of 906 Electrical specifications This section lists the electrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card. Data transmission specifications Table 110 provides specifications for the 32 transmit-only modem resources.
PAGE 318
Page 318 of 906 NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) Configuration The NT5D60/80 CLASS Modem card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and reports that information back to the CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 CPU through the Card LAN interface.
PAGE 319
366 Page 319 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Contents The following are the topics in this section: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 320
Page 320 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card The NT5D97 DDP2 card hardware design uses a B57 ASIC E1/T1 framer. The carrier specifications comply with the ANSI TI.403 specification. The NT5D97 provides an interface to the 2.048 Mbps external digital line either directly or through an office repeater, Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE), or Line Terminating Unit (LTU).
PAGE 321
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 321 of 906 Table 112 indicates how the RR control signal operates with regard to the DDP2 status.
PAGE 322
Page 322 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Figure 65 NT5D97 faceplate D-Channel LED ENET LED Trunk Disable LED Trunk Out of Service LED Near End Alarm LED Far End Alarm LED Loop Back LED Enb Dis Recovered Clock0#1 Recovered Clock0#2 Recovered Clock1#1 Recovered Clock1#2 Trunk0 / Trunk1 External DCHI/MSDL 553-7380 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 323
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 323 of 906 Table 113 External connectors and LEDs Function Faceplate Designator Type Description Switch ENB/DIS Plastic, ESD protected Card Enable/disable switch Connectors Unit 0 Clock 0 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 0 to Clock Controller card 0 Unit 0 Clock 1 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 0 to Clock Controller card 1 Unit 1 Clock 0 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 1 to Clock Controller card 0 Unit 1 Clock 1 RJ11 Connecto
PAGE 324
Page 324 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card The following sections provide a brief description of each element on the faceplate. Enable/Disable Switch This switch is used to disable the card prior to insertion or removal from the network shelf. While this switch is in disable position, the card will not respond to the system CPU. ENET LEDs Two red LEDs indicate if the “ENET0” and “ENET1” portions of the card are disabled.
PAGE 325
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 325 of 906 LBK LEDs Two yellow LEDs indicate if a remote loopback test is being performed on trunk port 0 or trunk port 1. The loopback indication is active when the digital trunk is in remote loopback mode. Normal call processing is inhibited during the remote loopback test. DCH LED When the dual colored LED is red, it indicates the on-board DDCH is present but disabled. When the dual colored LED is green, it indicates the on-board DDCH is present and enabled.
PAGE 326
Page 326 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Port definitions Since the NT5D97 card is dual-card, it equips two ports; these ports can be defined in the following combinations: Table 114 NT5D97AA/AB loops configuration Loop 1 Loop 0 not configured DTI2 PRI2 not configured V V V DTI2 V V V PRI2 V V V Table 115 NT5D97AD loops configuration Loop 1 Loop 0 not configured DTI2 PRI2 DDCS not configured V V V V DTI2 V V V V PRI2 V V V X DDCS V V X V Note: Each loop DP
PAGE 327
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 327 of 906 System capacity and performance Physical capacity Each NT5D97 DDP2 card occupies one slot on the network shelf. Each card supports two digital trunk circuits and two network loops. The total number of DDP2 cards per system is limited by the number of network loops, physical capacity of the shelf, number of DTI2/PRI2 interfaces allowed by the software and the range of DCH addresses.
PAGE 328
Page 328 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Power requirements Table 116 lists the power requirements for the NT5D97 DDP2 card. Table 116 NT5D97 DDP2 power requirements Voltage Source Current DDP2 (without NTBK51AA) DDP2 (with NTBK51AA) +5V Backplane 3A 3.8A +12V Backplane 25mA 75mA -12V Backplane 25mA 75mA 15.6W 20.8W Total Power (Maximum) Cable requirements This section lists the types of cable used and the lengths required for internal and external NT5D97 DDP2 connections.
PAGE 329
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 329 of 906 — NTCG03AB — NTCG03AC — NTCG03AD • DDP2 to DCH cables — NTCK46AA — NTCK46AB — NTCK46AC — NTCK46AD • DDP2 to MSDL cables — NTCK80AA — NTCK80AB — NTCK80AC — NTCK80AD A description of each type of DDP2 cable follows. E1 carrier cables NTCK45AA (A0407956) The NTCK45AA (8 ft.) is an 120Ω cable for systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the TRK port (P1, D-type 9 pin male) on the DDP2 faceplate to the I/O filter (P2, P3 D-type 9 pin males).
PAGE 330
Page 330 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Figure 66 NTCK45AA P2 P1 P3 D-type 9 pin, males D-type 15 pin, males 553-7385 Table 117 which follows lists the pin attributes for the NTCK45AA cable.
PAGE 331
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 331 of 906 Table 117 NTCK45AA cable pins (Part 2 of 2) Description Color DDP2 pins I/O Panel pins 1 GND Shield Wire Bare N/C Case P3 1 Standard Wire (3”) Bare Case P3 P3-5 1 Standard Wire (3”) Bare Case P3 P3-9 Cable Name NT8D7217 (A0617192) The NT8D7217 (50 ft.) is an 120Ω cable for systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the 9 pin I/O filter connector to the 9 pin NCTE connector.
PAGE 332
Page 332 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Table 118 NT8D7217 cable pins (Part 2 of 2) Description Color DDP2 pins I/O Panel pins 0 GND Shield Wire Bare P1-5 N/C 0 GND Shield Wire Bare P1-9 N/C Cable Name 1 T-PRI1TX Trunk 1 Transmit Tip Black P1-6 P2-6 1 R-PRI1TX Trunk 1 Transmit Ring White P1-7 P2-7 1 T-PRI1RX Trunk 1 Receive Tip Black P1-2 P2-2 1 R-PRI1RX Trunk 1 Receive Ring Red P1-3 P2-3 1 GND Shield Wire Bare P1-5 N/C 1 GND Shield Wire Bare P1-9
PAGE 333
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 333 of 906 Table 119 lists the pin attributes for the NTCK78AA cable.
PAGE 334
Page 334 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Figure 69 NTCK79AA P2: Unit 0 Tx P3: Unit 0 Rx P4: Unit 1 Tx P1 D-type 9 pin, male P5: Unit 1 Rx BNC males 553-7388 Table 120 lists the pin attributes for the NTCK79AA cable.
PAGE 335
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 335 of 906 Table 120 NTCK79AA cable pins (Part 2 of 2) Description Color DDP2 pins NCTE pins 1 Outer metallized PVC shield Bare N/C P1 Case 1 3 stranded wire Bare N/C P1 Case Cable Name Reference clock cables The NTCG03AA (14 ft), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft), NTCG03AC (4.
PAGE 336
Page 336 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card • NTCK46AC (35 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable • NTCK46AD (50 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable Figure 71 NTCK46AA/AB/AC/AD P2 P1 D-type 9 pin, males P3 D-type 15 pin, males 553-7387 External MSDL cable The NTCK80 cable connects the DDP2 card to the NT6D80 MSDL card.
PAGE 337
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 337 of 906 Cable diagrams Figure 73 on page 338 and Figure 74 on page 339 provide examples of typical cabling configurations for the DDP2. Figure 73 shows a typical DDP2 cabling for a system with an I/O panel, with the connection between the I/O panel and a Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE). Figure 74 shows cabling for a system without an I/O panel. Here, the DDP2 faceplate is cabled directly to the NCTE.
PAGE 338
Page 338 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Figure 73 DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel Switch Enb Dis Clock Controllers LED's clk0 Port 0 clk1 clk0 Port 1 clk1 Trunk NCTE (MDF or LTU) NCTE NT8D7217 cable NTCK78AA/NTCK79AA cable NT8D7217 cable NTCK80 cable to MSDL or NTCK48 cable to DCHI DCH NT6D80 MSDL or NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/ NT5K35AA DCHI Note: for possible clock cabling options, refer to the "Clocking configurations" chapter 553-8489 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 339
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 339 of 906 Figure 74 DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel Switch Enb Dis Clock Controllers NTCG03 cables LED's clk0 Unit 0 clk1 NCTE (MDF or LTU) clk0 Unit 1 clk1 Trunk DCH NTCK78AA/NTCK79AA cable NTCK80 cable to MSDL or NTCK48 cable to DCHI NT6D80 MSDL or NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/ NT5K35AA DCHI Note: for possible clock cabling options, refer to the "Clocking configurations" chapter 553-7400 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 340
Page 340 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Functional description NT5D97 circuit card locations Each NT5D97 card requires one slot on a shelf. NT5D97 cards can be placed in any card slot in the network bus. Note in all cases - If an NT8D72BA/NTCK43 card is being replaced by a DDP2 card, the D-channel Handler can be reconnected to the DDP2 card, or removed if an onboard NTBK51DDCH card is used. Also, DIP Switches in the NT5D97 must be set properly before insertion.
PAGE 341
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 341 of 906 Table 121 DIP switch settings for NT5D97AA/AB (Part 2 of 2) Card Trunks 0 and 1 Port 0 Port 1 Trunk 0 Trunk 1 S5 S11 S6 S12 S7 S13 Receiver Interface S8 S14 General Purpose S9 S15 LBO Setting The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows the factory set-up.
PAGE 342
Page 342 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Figure 75 Dip switches for NT5D97AA/AB 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 343
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 343 of 906 Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB Impedance level and unit mode The S9/S15 switch selects the impedance level and loop operation mode on DEI2 OR PRI2. Refer to Table 122.
PAGE 344
Page 344 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Note: Do not change this setup. Table 124 Trunk interface line build out switch settings Switch setting Description S5/S11 S6/S12 S7/S13 0dB OFF OFF OFF Receiver impedance A per-trunk set of four DIP switches (S8/S14 provides selection between 75 or 120 ohm values. Refer to Table 125.
PAGE 345
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 345 of 906 Table 126 Ring ground switch settings (Part 2 of 2) Switch Description S2 switch settingS 3 Trunk 1 Transmit OFF-Ring line is not grounded ON- Ring line is grounded 4 Trunk 1 Receive OFF-Ring line is not grounded ON- Ring line is grounded DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughter board for NT5D97AA/AB In case of an on-board NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard, set of four switches (S3) provide the daughterboard address.
PAGE 346
Page 346 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Table 128 NTBK51AA daughterboard address select switch settings (Part 2 of 2) Device Address Switch Setting 2 OFF ON OFF OFF 3 ON ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON OFF 5 ON OFF ON OFF 6 OFF ON ON OFF 7 ON ON ON OFF 8 OFF OFF OFF ON 9 ON OFF OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON ON 13 ON OFF ON ON 14 OFF ON ON ON 15 ON ON ON ON Note 1: The system contains a maximum number of 16 DCHI
PAGE 347
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 347 of 906 NT5D97AD DIP switch settings The the NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for trunk parameters settings for port0 and port1 respectively. Additionally, the DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring Ground setting. The NT5D97AA/AB has one set of eight DIP switches and NT5D97AD has two sets of ten DIP switches for the D-channel Handler parameters setting.
PAGE 348
Page 348 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Figure 76 Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD 1 AB NT5D97AD Daughter Board NTBK51 BA 17 P2 S1 S9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 BA S8 22 S12 1 2 3 4 Face Plate 1 S6 S11 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 S16 Backplane Connector P3 S7 1 2 3 4 P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 S5 S15 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 S4 S14 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 S3 S13 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 S2 S10 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Daughter Board NTAG54 Not to scale 60 A B 553-AAA0367 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 349
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 349 of 906 Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AD Trunk 0 switches Switch S12 gives the MPU information about its environment. Table 130 General purpose switches for NT5D97AD Switch Description S9/S15 Switch Setting S12_1 Impedance level OFF - 120 ohm ON - 75 ohm S12_2 Spare X S12_3 Spare X S12_4 Unit mode OFF - Unit operates in the DTI2 mode ON - Unit operates in the PRI2 mode Switch S2 selects the Transmission mode.
PAGE 350
Page 350 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Switch S6 selects the Receiver interface. Table 133 Receiver interface switches for NT5D97AD Impedance S6-1 S6-2 S6-3 S6-4 75 ohm OFF OFF ON OFF 120 οhm OFF OFF OFF ON Trunk 1 switches for NT5D97AD Table 134 Trunk 1 switches Switch Function S7 General Purpose...See Table 130 on page 349 S10 TX Mode...See Table 131 on page 349 S13, S14 & S15 LBO...See Table 132 on page 349 S11 RX Impedance...
PAGE 351
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 351 of 906 DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughterboard for NT5D97AD Switch S9 selects the NTBK51AA DCH daughter card address. Switch S8 is not used when the NTBK51AA daughter card is used. S8_1-10 can be set to OFF position.
PAGE 352
Page 352 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card MSDL external card Table 137 Switch settings for MSDL external card Switch number Function S9_1-10 X S8_1-10 X Use Table 138 to set the card address.
PAGE 353
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 353 of 906 Table 138 Switch setting for MSDL external card (Part 2 of 2) Switch Setting DNUM (LD 17) 1 2 3 4 13 ON OFF ON ON 14 OFF ON ON ON 15 ON ON ON ON Architecture Clock operation There are two types of clock operation - tracking mode and free-run mode. Tracking mode In tracking mode, the DDP2 loop supplies an external clock reference to a clock controller.
PAGE 354
Page 354 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Figure 77 Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking Clock Controller 0 J1 Primary clocking source REF 1 Primary Primary Reference J2 J3 Primary REF 2 Secondary clocking source REF 1 Secondary Secondary Reference REF 2 Clock Controller Backup Clock Controller 1 Secondary J1 J2 J3 553-7401 Reference clock errors CS 1000 Release 4.
PAGE 355
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 355 of 906 system switches to the back-up clock controller, without affecting which reference clock is being tracked. A reference-clock error occurs when there is a problem with the clock driver or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects a reference-clock error, the reference clocks are switched. Automatic clock recovery A command for automatic clock recovery can be selected in LD 60 with the command EREF.
PAGE 356
Page 356 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Automatic clock switching If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or secondary reference clock is automatically switched in the following manner: • If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it switches to the secondary reference clock and sends appropriate DTC maintenance messages. • If software is unable to track on the assigned secondary reference clock, it switches to free run.
PAGE 357
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 357 of 906 Table 139 summarizes the clocking options. Table 140 on page 358 explains the options in more detail.
PAGE 358
Page 358 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Table 140 Clock Controller options - description Clock Option Notes Option 1 This option provides a single CPU system with 2 clock sources derived from the 2 ports of the DDP2. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 0. Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 1. Refer to Figure 78. Option 2 This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a clock source derived from port 0 of the DDP2.
PAGE 359
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 359 of 906 Figure 78 Clock Controller – Option 1 Clock Controller 0 J1 Primary clocking source REF 1 Primary J2 Primary Reference J3 Primary REF 2 Secondary clocking source REF 1 Clock Controller Backup Secondary Secondary Reference REF 2 Clock Controller 1 Secondary J1 J2 J3 553-7401 Operation The following discussion describes possible scenarios when replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA PRI2 card or QPC536E DTI2 card or NTCK43 Dual PRI card configuration
PAGE 360
Page 360 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Figure 79 Clock Controller – Option 2 Clock Controller for CPU 0 J1 Sec. DDP2 Primary Reference clk 0 Primary Ref 1 J2 Prim. Port 0 Primary Ref 2 clk 1 Clk0 Port 1 Secondary Ref 1 Clk1 DDP2 Secondary Reference clk 0 Secondary Ref 1 Clock Controller for CPU 1 Port 0 Secondary Ref 2 clk 1 J1 Sec. J2 Prim.
PAGE 361
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 361 of 906 Figure 80 Clock Controller – Option 3 DDP2 clk 0 Clock Controller for CPU 0 Port 0 clk 1 Primary Reference Clk0 J1 Sec. Primary Ref 1 J2 Prim. Port 1 Primary Ref 2 Clk1 Secondary Ref 1 DDP2 Clock Controller for CPU 1 clk 0 Port 0 J1 Sec. clk 1 Secondary Reference Clk0 J2 Prim.
PAGE 362
Page 362 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Figure 81 Clock Controller – Option 4 Clock Controller for CPU 0 DDP2 Primary Reference J1 Sec. clk 0 Primary Ref 1 J2 Prim. Port 0 Primary Ref 2 clk 1 Secondary Reference Clk0 Secondary Ref 1 Clock Controller for CPU 1 Port 1 Clk1 Secondary Ref 2 J1 Sec. J2 Prim. Both references from both ports 553-7402 Case 1 - The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two digital trunks.
PAGE 363
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 363 of 906 Case 3 - The network shelf is full, one port of a QPC414 network card is connected to a digital trunk, and the second is connected to a peripheral buffer. This arrangement is repeated for another QPC414. The digital trunks are located in a shelf that provides only power. In this case, the peripheral buffers will have to be re-assigned, so that each pair of buffers will use both ports of the same QPC414 card.
PAGE 364
Page 364 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 8 Run and connect the NT5D97 cables. CAUTION Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller and NT5D97 card must NOT be routed through the center of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead they should be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves. 9 If required, install connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal. 10 If required, designate connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted cross-connect terminal.
PAGE 365
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card Page 365 of 906 3 If the NT5D97 card is being completely removed, not replaced, remove data from memory. 4 Remove cross connections at MDF to wall-mounted cross-connect terminal. 5 Tag and disconnect cables from card. 6 Rearrange Clock Controller cables if required. CAUTION Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller and DDP2 card must NOT be routed through the center of the cabinet past the power harness.
PAGE 366
Page 366 of 906 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card • Port 0 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 0 of the NT5D97 DDP2 card, and Port 1 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 1 of the NT5D97. This relationship must be reflected when configuring a new DCH in LD 17 (in response to the DCHL prompt, enter either 0 or 1 when specifying the loop number used by the DCH).
PAGE 367
368 Page 367 of 906 NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 368
Page 368 of 906 NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card Applications The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card can be used for the following applications: 553-3001-211 • NT5K02AA high-voltage Message Waiting analog line card typically used in Australia • NT5K02DA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in France • NT5K02EA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used in Germany • NT5K02FA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog lin
PAGE 369
378 Page 369 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 MFC signaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 MFE signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Sender and receiver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 370
Page 370 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Signaling levels MFC signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits, and is divided into two levels: • Level 1: used when a call is first established and may be used to send the dialed digits. • Level 2: used after Level 1 signaling is completed and may contain such information as the status, capabilities, or classifications of both calling parties.
PAGE 371
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 371 of 906 MFC signaling involves two or more levels of forward signals and two or more levels of backward signals. Separate sets of frequencies are used for forward and backward signals: • Forward signals. Level I forward signals are dialed address digits that identify the called party. Subsequent levels of forward signals describe the category (Class of Service) of the calling party, and may include the calling party status and identity. • Backward signals.
PAGE 372
Page 372 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Table 141 MFC Frequency values (Part 2 of 2) Digit Forward direction DOD-Tx, DID-Rx backward direction DOD-Rx, DID-Tx 14 1740 Hz + 1980 Hz 780 Hz + 540 Hz 15 1860 Hz + 1980 Hz 660 Hz + 540 Hz The exact meaning of each MFC signal number (1-15) within each level can be programmed separately for each trunk route using MFC. This programming can be done by the customer and allows users to suit the needs of each MFC-equipped trunk route.
PAGE 373
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 373 of 906 Table 142 MFE Frequency values (Part 2 of 2) Digit Forward direction OG-Tx, IC-Rx Backward direction 5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz — 6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz — 7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz — 8 900 Hz + 1500 Hz — 9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz — 10 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz — Sender and receiver mode The XMFC/MFE circuit card provides the interface between the system’s CPU and the trunk circuit which uses MFC or MFE signaling.
PAGE 374
Page 374 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card XMFC sender and receiver specifications Table 143 and Table 144 provide the operating requirements for the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card. These specifications conform to CCITT R2 recommendations: Q.441, Q.442, Q.451, Q.454, and Q.455. Table 143 XMFC sender specifications Forward frequencies in DOD mode: 1380, 1500, 1620, 1740, 1860, 1980 Hz Backward frequencies in DOD mode: 1140, 1020, 900, 780, 660, 540 Hz Frequency tolerance: +/- 0.
PAGE 375
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 375 of 906 Table 144 XMFC receiver specifications (Part 2 of 2) Tone Interrupt no release: < 8 msec. Receiver on, while tone missing Longest Input tone ignored: < 8 msec.
PAGE 376
Page 376 of 906 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Table 146 XMFE receiver specifications Input sensitivity: accepted: rejected: rejected: rejected: Bandwidth: accepted: Amplitude twist: accepted: -4 dBm to -35 dBm +/- 10 Hz of nominal -42 dBm signals -4 dBmoutside 500-1900 Hz -40 dBmsingle/multiple sine wave in 500-1900 Hz fc +/- 20 Hz difference of 9 dB between frequency pair Operating time: < 64 msec. Release time: < 64 msec.
PAGE 377
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Page 377 of 906 Table 147 Physical specifications (Part 2 of 2) Cabinet Location Must be placed in the main cabinet (Slots 1-10) Power requirements 1.
PAGE 378
Page 378 of 906 553-3001-211 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card Standard 3.
PAGE 379
384 Page 379 of 906 NT6D70 SILC Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 380
Page 380 of 906 NT6D70 SILC Line card B-channels transmit user voice and data information at high speeds, while D-channels are packet-switched links that carry call set-up, signaling and other user data across the network. One single DSL can carry two simultaneous voice or data conversations to the same or to different locations. In either case, the D-channel can also be used for packet communication to a third location simultaneously.
PAGE 381
NT6D70 SILC Line card Page 381 of 906 A logical terminal is any terminal that can communicate with the system over a DSL. It can be directly connected to the DSL through its own physical termination or be indirectly connected through a common physical termination. The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge; however, it should not exceed 1 km (3,280 ft).
PAGE 382
Page 382 of 906 NT6D70 SILC Line card The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU. The serial control interface is an IPE bus used by the MPU to communicate with the S/T transceivers. IPE interface logic The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, an IPE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock controller and converter.
PAGE 383
NT6D70 SILC Line card Page 383 of 906 The transceiver circuits provide four-wire full-duplex S/T bus interface. This bus supports multiple physical terminations on one DSL where each physical termination supports multiple logical B-channel and D-channel ISDN BRI terminals. Idle circuit-switched B-channels can be allocated for voice or data transmission to terminals making calls on a DSL.
PAGE 384
Page 384 of 906 553-3001-211 NT6D70 SILC Line card Standard 3.
PAGE 385
388 Page 385 of 906 NT6D71 UILC Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 386
Page 386 of 906 NT6D71 UILC Line card Power consumption Power consumption is +5 V at 1900 mA. Functional description Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports one physical termination. This termination can be to a Network Termination (NT1) or directly to a single U interface terminal. Usually, this physical termination is to an NT1, which provides an S/T interface that supports up to eight physical terminal connections.
PAGE 387
NT6D71 UILC Line card Page 387 of 906 The serial control interface is an IPE bus that communicates with the U transceivers. IPE interface logic The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a IPE bus interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock converter. The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed.
PAGE 388
Page 388 of 906 553-3001-211 NT6D71 UILC Line card Standard 3.
PAGE 389
426 Page 389 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Engineering guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 390
Page 390 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card that support the same functions. For example, three cards supported with the MSDL (NT6D80) are QPC757 (DCHI), QPC513 (ESDI), QPC841 (SDI) and NTSD12 (DDP). Though the MSDL is designed to coexist with other cards, the number of ports supported by a system equipped with MSDL cards is potentially four times greater than when using other cards.
PAGE 391
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 391 of 906 Figure 82 MSDL component layout Card Address Switches Tens Ones LED S9 S10 DCE Port 0 DTE S4 DCE Port 1 S8 DTE ON S7 DTE ON S2 DCE Port 3 422 232 ON ON S3 DCE Port 2 422 232 ON ON ON S6 DTE ON S1 422 232 422 232 S5 Monitor Port 553-5431 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 392
Page 392 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Functional description Figure 83 on page 393 illustrates the MSDL functional block diagram. The MSDL card is divided into four major functional blocks: • CPU bus interface • Micro Processing Unit (MPU) • Memory • Serial interface Two processing units serve as the foundation for the MSDL operation: the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and the MSDL Micro Processing Unit (MPU). CS 1000 Release 4.5 software, MSDL firmware, and peripheral software control MSDL parameters.
PAGE 393
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 393 of 906 Figure 83 MSDL block diagram CPU Bus Address Bus Control Bus Data Bus Control and Data Transceivers Address Buffer and Decoding Logic Shared Resource Arbitrator MPU Address Decoding Logic Interface Registers Memory Address Counter & Buffer Shared Memory Micro Processing Unit (68020 MPU) Memory MPU Bus Address Bus Control Bus Data Bus DMA Arbitrator Parallel I/O Controller Integrated Serial Communication Controllers RS-232 Transceiver RS-232/422 Transceiver
PAGE 394
Page 394 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Micro Processing Unit (MPU) The MPU, which is based on a Motorola 68020 processor, coordinates and controls data transfer and port addressing, communicating via the CPU bus with the system. Prioritized interrupts tell the MPU which tasks to perform. Memory The MSDL card contains two megabytes of Random Access Memory (RAM) for storing downloaded peripheral software that controls MSDL port operations.
PAGE 395
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 395 of 906 Equipment emulation mode – Configure an MSDL port to emulate DCE or DTE by setting switches on the card and downloading LD 17 interface parameters. I/O port electrical interface – Each MSDL port can be configured as an RS-232 or RS-422 interface by setting the switches on the MSDL card. MSDL ports use Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) II 26-pin female connectors. Figure 84 on page 396 shows the system architecture using the MSDL as an operational platform.
PAGE 396
Page 396 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Figure 84 MSDL functional block diagram Application Module Link System AML Handler D-Channel System DCH Handler MSDL Handler System software CPU Bus MSDL software modules Boot Code & Loader Modules P S O S + System Interface Module AML Loadware DCH Loadware Physical Layer (Layer 1) Handler Port 0 Meridian Link Port 1 Meridian Mail Port 2 PRI Trunk Port 3 PRI Trunk 553-5433 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 397
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 397 of 906 Data flow The MSDL transmit interface, managed by the MSDL handler, sends data from the system to the MSDL. This interface receives packetized data from the system and stores it in the transmit buffer on the MSDL. The transmit buffer transports these messages to the appropriate buffers, from which the messages travel over the MSDL port to the I/O equipment. The MSDL uses the MSDL receive interface to communicate with the system.
PAGE 398
Page 398 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Card mix A system that exclusively uses MSDL cards can support up to 16 such cards, providing 64 ports. These ports can be used to run various synchronous and asynchronous operations simultaneously. The system will also support a mix of interface cards (MSDL, DCHI, and ESDI for example). However, using multiple card types will reduce the number of cards and ports available. Address decoding The MSDL card decodes the full address information received from the system.
PAGE 399
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 399 of 906 Table 148 lists the synchronous interface specifications and the means of configuring the interface parameters. Table 148 Synchronous interface specifications Parameter Specification Configured Data bits In packets-Transparent N/A Data rate 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.
PAGE 400
Page 400 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Table 149 Asynchronous interface specifications (Part 2 of 2) Parameter Mode Specification Configured RS-422 Switches DTE or DCE Switches Emulation mode Each port can be configured to emulate a DCE port or a DTE port by setting the appropriate switches on the MSDL. For details on how to set the switches, refer to “Installation” on page 404 of this document.
PAGE 401
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 401 of 906 Table 150 RS-232 interface pin assignments (Part 2 of 2) Pin Signal name EIA circuit CCITT circuit DTE DCE 3 Receive Data (RX) BB 104 X 4 Request to Send (RTS) CA 105 5 Clear to Send (CTS) CB 106 X 6 Data Set Ready (DSR) CC 107 X 7 Signal Ground (SG) AB 102 8 Carrier Detect (CD) CF 109 X 15 Serial Clock Transmit (SCT) DB 114 X 17 Serial Clock Receive (SCR) DD 115 X 18 Local Loopback (LL) LL 141 X 20 Data Terminal Ready (DT
PAGE 402
Page 402 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card supported circuit type. It also indicates whether the signal originates at the DTE or DCE device.
PAGE 403
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 403 of 906 • A maximum of eight MSDL cards can be installed in a fully occupied module because of the module’s power supply limitations. • The Clock Controller card should not be installed in a module if more than 10 MSDL ports are configured as active RS-232 (rather than RS-422) ports in that module because of the module’s power supply limitations. • The MSDL address must not overlap other card addresses.
PAGE 404
Page 404 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card The internal power supply in each module provides DC power for the MSDL and other cards. Power consumption and heat dissipation for the MSDL is listed in Table 153. Table 153 MSDL power consumption Voltage (VAC) Current (Amps) Power (Watts) Heat (BTUs) +5 +12 –12 3.20 0.10 0.10 16.00 1.20 1.20 55.36 4.15 4.15 Installation Device number Before installing MSDL cards, determine which of the devices in the system are available.
PAGE 405
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 405 of 906 settings shown in this figure are an example of the different types of interfaces available. Your system settings may differ.
PAGE 406
Page 406 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Figure 85 MSDL switch setting example Care Locking Device Card Address Select Switches Tens Ones LED S9 DCE Port 0 ON ON S4 S8 DTE DCE Port 1 ON ON S3 DCE ON Setting for an RS-422 DTE interface ON S2 Setting for an RS-422 DCE interface S6 DTE DCE ON Port 3 S1 Setting for an RS-232 interface DTE/DCE are software configured S7 DTE Port 2 ON S10 DTE S5 Setting for an RS-232 interface DTE/DCE are software configured Monitor Port 553-5434 I/O Port Inte
PAGE 407
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 407 of 906 Installing the MSDL card Procedure 16 Installing the MSDL card To install an MSDL card follow these steps: 1 Set Device Number S10 and S9. 2 Hold the MSDL by its card-locking devices. Squeeze the tabs to unlatch the card locking devices and lift the locking device out and away from the card. Be careful not to touch connector pins, conductor traces, or integrated circuits. Static discharge may damage integrated circuits.
PAGE 408
Page 408 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Cable requirements The MSDL card includes four high-density 26-pin (SCSI II) female connectors for ports and one 8-pin miniature DIN connector for the monitor port. See Figure 86 on page 409 for a diagram of the MSDL cabling configuration. A D-Channel on the MSDL requires a connection from the appropriate MSDL port connector to the DCH connector located on the ISDN PRI trunk faceplate.
PAGE 409
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 409 of 906 Figure 86 MSDL cabling ESDI to I/O cable (NTND27AB—6 ft.) RS-232 shielded (QCAD328— 35 ft. max.) I/O panel I/O panel NTND27 ISL/PRI ISL Q P C 7 2 0 APL applications (RS-232 cable) M S D L SDI to terminal cable 720 NTND25AA—6 ft. NTND26AB—18 ft. NTND26AC—35 ft. NTND26AD—50 ft.
PAGE 410
Page 410 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Note: The choices of cable to use with an MSDL card depend on what type of modem is connected. For example, the NTND27 cable is used when the modem has a DB25 connection. If the modem is v.35, a customized or external vendor cable is required.
PAGE 411
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 411 of 906 5 Plug the DB15 male connector end of the cable into the J5 DB15 female connector on the PRI card. 6 Secure the connections in place with their fasteners. 7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each connection. End of Procedure I/O panel connections Operations aside from PRI require cable connections to the I/O panel.
PAGE 412
Page 412 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card MSDL planning form Use the following planning form to help sort and store information concerning the MSDL cards in your system as shown in the sample. Record switch settings for unequipped ports as well as for equipped ports. MSDL data form Device no. Shelf Slot Card ID Boot Code version Switch setting Cable no. Date installed Last update Ports Operation Logical no. Operation information 0 1 2 3 Sample Device no.
PAGE 413
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 413 of 906 Maintenance Routine maintenance consists of enabling and disabling MSDL cards and downloading new versions of peripheral software. These activities are performed by an authorized person such as a system administrator. Troubleshooting the MSDL consists of determining problem types, isolating problem sources, and solving the problem. A craftsperson normally performs these activities.
PAGE 414
Page 414 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Figure 87 MSDL states Manually disabled 1 2 Enabled 3 5 4 System disabled 553-5435 A newly configured MSDL automatically enters the manually disabled state. An operating MSDL can be manually disabled by issuing the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 (step 1 in Figure 87). Entering the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 moves the card to manually disabled status and stops all system communication with the card (step 5 in Figure 87).
PAGE 415
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 415 of 906 System disabled When the system disables the MSDL card (step 4 in Figure 87 on page 414), it continues to communicate and attempt maintenance procedures on the card. To stop all system communication with the card, enter DIS MSDL x to disable it (step 5 in Figure 87 on page 414). Otherwise, the system periodically tries to enable the card, attempting recovery during the midnight routines (step 3 in Figure 87 on page 414).
PAGE 416
Page 416 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card • Recovery Threshold The MSDL card was successfully enabled by the MSDL autorecovery function five times within 30 minutes. Each time it was system disabled because of a problem encountered during operation. • Bootloading The MSDL base software is in the process of being downloaded to the MSDL. Detailed information on system disabled substates and the action required for each substate appears in “Symptoms and actions” on page 422.
PAGE 417
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 417 of 906 Manually controlled maintenance Use manual maintenance commands found in the following programs to enable, disable, reset, get the status of, and perform self-tests on the MSDL card: • Input/Output Diagnostic Program LD 37 • Program LD 42 • Link Diagnostic Program LD 48 • PRI D-channel Diagnostic Program LD 96 For a complete discussion of these programs, refer to Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311). Note 1: Enter commands after the dot (.) prompt.
PAGE 418
Page 418 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Disabling the MSDL To disable an MSDL card, enter DIS MSDL x. To disable the MSDL and all its ports, enter DIS MSDL x ALL. Resetting the MSDL To reset an MSDL and initiate a limited self-test, the MSDL must be in a manually disabled state. To perform the reset, enter RST MSDL x. Displaying MSDL status To display the status of all MSDL cards, enter STAT MSDL. To display the status of a specific MSDL, enter STAT MSDL x.
PAGE 419
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 419 of 906 Manually isolating and correcting faults Problems are due to configuration errors that occur during installation or hardware faults resulting from component failure during operation. See “Symptoms and actions” on page 422 for more information on problem symptoms and required responses. Isolate MSDL faults using the diagnostic tools described below: 1 Observe and list the problem symptoms; for example, a typical symptom is a permanently lit LED.
PAGE 420
Page 420 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Previously operating MSDL cards Problems that occur during normal operation usually result from faulty cards. Follow these steps to evaluate the situation: 1 2 Use the STAT MSDL x command to check MSDL card status. See “Displaying MSDL status” on page 418. If the card has been manually disabled, try to enable it using ENL MSDL x. See “Enabling the MSDL” on page 417. If this fails, perform self-testing as described in step 4.
PAGE 421
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 421 of 906 Replacing MSDL cards After completing MSDL troubleshooting you may determine that one or more MSDL cards are defective. Remove the defective cards and replace them with new ones. Procedure 19 Replacing an MSDL card An MSDL card can be removed from and inserted into a system module without turning off the power to the module. Follow these steps: 1 Log in on the maintenance terminal. 2 At the > prompt, type LD 37 (you can also use LD 42, LD 48, or LD 96) and press Enter.
PAGE 422
Page 422 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card Symptoms and actions Explained here are some of the symptoms, diagnoses, and actions required to resolve MSDL card problems. Contact your Nortel representative for further assistance. These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card to an enabled state following installation or operational problems. Symptom: The LED on the MSDL card is steadily lit. Diagnosis: The MSDL card is disabled or faulty.
PAGE 423
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 423 of 906 System disabled actions These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the card to an enabled state following system disabling. SYSTEM DISABLED—NOT RESPONDING Cause: The MSDL card is not installed or is unable to respond to the messages from the system. Action: Check the MSDL messages on the console and take the action recommended. Refer to Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).
PAGE 424
Page 424 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card using autorecovery. If a diagnostic program (overlay) is active, the downloading of the MSDL base code occurs later. Action: Wait to see if the system will enable the card immediately. If the MSDL is enabled, no further action is necessary. If the MSDL base code download fails five times, autorecovery stops.
PAGE 425
NT6D80 MSDL card Page 425 of 906 SYSTEM DISABLED—OVERLOAD Cause: The system received an excessive number of messages from the MSDL card in a certain time. If the card invokes overload four times in 30 minutes, it exceeds the recovery threshold as described in “SYSTEM DISABLED—RECOVERY THRESHOLD.” The system resets the card, invokes self-tests, and attempts to enable the card. The problem may be due to excessive traffic on one or more MSDL ports. Traffic load redistribution may resolve this condition.
PAGE 426
Page 426 of 906 NT6D80 MSDL card SYSTEM DISABLED—FATAL ERROR Cause: The MSDL card encountered a fatal error and cannot recover. The exact reason for the fatal error is shown in the MSDL300 error message output to the console of TTY when the error occurred. Action: Check the MSDL300 message to find out the reason. Alternatively, display the status of the MSDL, which also indicates the cause of the problem, with the STAT MSDL x command and check the information to find the cause of the fatal error.
PAGE 427
526 Page 427 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Content list The following are the topics in this section: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Dialing operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 428
Page 428 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Introduction The NT7D16 Data Access card (DAC) is a data interface card that integrates the functionality of the QPC723A RS-232 4-Port Interface Line card (RILC) and the QPC430 Asynchronous Interface Line card (AILC). This combination allows the NT7D16 DAC to work with the RS-232-C interface, the RS-422 interface, or both. The DAC supports up to six ports, each capable of operating in RS-232-C or RS-422 mode.
PAGE 429
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 429 of 906 • Wire test mode • Self diagnostics • Inbound modem pooling with any asynchronous modems • Outbound modem pooling using “dumb” modems • Outbound modem pooling using auto dialing modems Controls and indicators The LEDs on the DAC faceplate indicate the status mode for each port. Figure 88 on page 431 shows the NT7D16 DAC faceplate. Card status The LED at the top of the faceplate is unlabeled.
PAGE 430
Page 430 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Port mode This lamp lights to indicate that the port indicated is in RS-422 mode. If the lamp is dark, the specified port is in RS-232-C mode. Port number The number displayed specifies the port driving the EIA signal LEDs mentioned above. The push-button switch below the display allows you to rotate among the six ports to monitor the activity of any port. This display is also used to monitor several error conditions.
PAGE 431
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 431 of 906 Figure 88 NT7D16 Data Access card faceplate card status SD RD EIA signal monitor LEDs DTR DSR DCD RI CONNECT CONNECT RS-422 Port mode Port number 2 Port select UN SEL Wire test WIRE TEST UN0 UN1 UN2 UN3 UN4 UN5 OFF ON NT7D16AA 553-5018 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 432
Page 432 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Call Set-up abort The user may abandon the call during the dialogue phase using one of the following methods: • Terminal off-line This method is useful for RS-232-C interface only. The equipment drops Data Terminal Ready (DTR) to indicate an idle connection. For example, if the equipment is turned off, the DAC interprets that signal as an idle connection. • Long break The user sends a break (transmit line held in the OFF or SPACE state) for more than 1.2 seconds.
PAGE 433
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 433 of 906 Note: If this feature is active, and the port is connected to a DTE that holds DTR OFF when idle, the port will be permanently busied out to inbound calls following the DTR timeout period. Inactivity timeout Once a successful data call is completed, the user's activity is monitored. If no activity occurs within the amount of time configured in the downloaded parameters, the DAC releases the call.
PAGE 434
Page 434 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 156 Wire test signal leads cycle counts Cycle count Label EIA Signal Lead description Pin RS-232-C RS-422 CTS Clear To Send 5 3 — DSR Data Set Ready 6 4 — DCD Carrier Detect 8 5 — DTR Data Terminal Ready 20 6 — RI Ring Indicator 22 7 — Note: The CTS signal is not included in the faceplate LED. Therefore, a 1.5-second delay will occur between the RxD lamp going on, and the DSR lamp going on. 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 435
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 435 of 906 Independent storage of dialing parameters Two dialing parameters, DCD control, and Answer mode, can be modified by both keyboard and Hayes dialing commands. The Hayes dialing mode also allows the user to modify the Input echo control, and Prompt/Result codes transmit control. With keyboard dialing, the Input echo control and Prompt/Response codes control are determined by the downloaded parameters. They cannot be altered through dialing commands.
PAGE 436
Page 436 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card The fourth mode, gateway, is a subset of the modem mode and is not normally used. This mode is useful if the attached modems do not have Ring Indicator lead. The application used is inbound modem pooling. The different modes enable the DAC to connect to different types of devices such as modems (modes 0, 1, 2, and 3), gateways (modes 4, 5. 6, and 7), hosts (modes 8. 9. 10, and 11), and terminals (modes 12. 13. 14, and 15).
PAGE 437
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 437 of 906 Table 157 DAC mode of operation selection (Part 2 of 5) Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11) Operation mode Modem/ Gateway/ Host/KBD Forced DTR* Hotline DEM PRM DTR HOT 2 (DTE) OFF “Host On” (RI) ON Forced OFF Not Hotline Modem Pool inbound and outbound (for Hayes 1200 modem) MSB by RI 3 (DTE) OFF “Host On” (RI) ON Forced ON Hotline Modem Pool inbound only (Hotline for Hayes 1200 modem only) 4 (DTE) ON “Keyboard Dialing (KBD) On” (N
PAGE 438
Page 438 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 157 DAC mode of operation selection (Part 3 of 5) Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11) Operation mode Modem/ Gateway/ Host/KBD Forced DTR* Hotline DEM PRM DTR HOT 6 (DTE) ON “KBD On” (No RI) ON Forced OFF Not Hotline Gateway inbound and outbound (DTR is on in idle state) MSB by DCD 7 (DTE) ON “KBD On” (No RI) ON Forced ON Hotline Gateway inbound only (Hotline by DCD: ON for Hotline OFF for VLL) (DTR is ON in idle state) 8 (DCE)
PAGE 439
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 439 of 906 Table 157 DAC mode of operation selection (Part 4 of 5) Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11) Operation mode Modem/ Gateway/ Host/KBD Forced DTR* Hotline DEM PRM DTR HOT 10 (DCE) OFF “Host On” (prompts off) ON Forced 11 (DCE) OFF “Host On” (prompts off) 12 (DCE) 13 (DCE) Type of device to be connected Group selection OFF Not Hotline Host similar to MCDS but does not require DTR to be ON Modes 8, 9, 10, and 11 are for RS232 Host conne
PAGE 440
Page 440 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 157 DAC mode of operation selection (Part 5 of 5) Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11) Operation mode Modem/ Gateway/ Host/KBD Forced DTR* Hotline DEM PRM DTR HOT 14 (DCE) ON “KBD On” (prompts on) ON Forced OFF Not Hotline Terminal similar to ASIM when set to forced DTR and Not Hotline 15 (DCE) ON “KBD On” (prompts on) ON Forced On Hotline Continuous Hotline when DTR is ON Type of device to be connected Group selection Modes
PAGE 441
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 441 of 906 In the case of outbound modem pooling, the DAC answers the data call and drives the DTR lead ON (modes 0 and 1). Then the calling data module and the DAC form a transparent link between the calling DTE and the modem. The DTE user may then enter the appropriate commands to the modem for dialing a remote modem. When the call is established, the modem may cause the DAC to disconnect the call by dropping either DSR or DCD.
PAGE 442
Page 442 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 89 DAC to modem connectivity DAC (DTE) Modem (DCE) pin 2 pin 3 (not required) pin 5 pin 6 pin 7 pin 8 pin 20 pin 22 >>> <<< <<< <<< <<< >>> <<< TX RX CTS DSR GND DCD DTR RI RS- 232 leads 553-5215 Mode 0 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a modem, except Hayes-1200, for inbound and outbound modem pooling (see modes 2 and 3 for Hayes-1200 modem).
PAGE 443
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 443 of 906 Auto-dial capability This feature is required when the modem is used for outbound modem pooling. It allows the modem to go off-hook and dial the remote number (such as Smartmodem Hayes-2400 or Bizcomp). Auto-reset capability This feature is required when the modem is used for outbound modem pooling. The modem should execute auto-reset when the DTR lead goes OFF. As a result, the modem must reset all its internal parameters to the default values.
PAGE 444
Page 444 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Programing DAC for mode 0 in service change LD11 When used for inbound or outbound Modem Pool only, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD11. When used for both inbound and outbound Modem Pool, the DAC must be configured as R232; station hunting for the outbound modem access should be in the opposite direction to the 500/2500 station hunting for the inbound modem access. See Figure 90 on page 445 for more details.
PAGE 445
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 445 of 906 Figure 90 DAC to Modem Pool connectivity System DAC Outbound hunting R232 port 0 Modem 1 R232 port 1 Modem 2 R232 port 2 Modem 3 R232 port 3 Modem 4 500/2500 line card Inbound hunting Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 553-AAA1126 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 446
Page 446 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Mode 1 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to an auto-answer modem for inbound Hotline operation. In this mode, the DAC automatically executes Hotline operation when RI is driven ON by the modem. The modem used should have the following features: Auto-answer capability This feature is required when the modem is used for inbound modem pooling. It allows the modem to drive the RI lead ON when ringing is present at its tip and ring.
PAGE 447
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 447 of 906 Programing DAC for mode 1 in service change LD11 The DAC must be configured as R232 (the Autodial feature key is used for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an Asynchronous Data Module (ADM) trunk. Mode 2 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a Hayes-1200 modem for inbound and outbound modem pooling. This mode is created specially to resolve some problems that were encountered with this modem, namely, the auto-reset implementation.
PAGE 448
Page 448 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Note: If Call Detail Recording (CDR) is required, use separate outbound and inbound Modem Pools. Mode 3 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a Hayes-1200 modem for inbound Hotline operation. It is recommended that mode 1 be used for inbound Hotline operations if some other modem is available. However, if only Hayes-1200 modems are available, then this mode could be used as a last resort.
PAGE 449
NT7D16 Data Access card • Page 449 of 906 The equipment can monitor the DTR lead (optional, depending on the mode selected). In modes 4, 5, 6, and 7, the DAC: • operates as a DTE • monitors the DSR • monitors DCD control leads • drives the DTR lead The RI lead is ignored. No menus or prompts are given when DCD is OFF. All prompts and messages are enabled for inbound calls and disabled for outbound calls. See Figure 91 on page 450 for more details.
PAGE 450
Page 450 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 91 DAC to Gateway connectivity DAC (DTE) Gateway (DCE) pin 2 pin 3 (not required) pin 5 pin 6 pin 7 pin 8 pin 20 (not required) pin 22 >>> <<< <<< <<< <<< >>> <<< TX RX CTS DSR GND DCD DTR RI RS- 232 leads 553-5217 Mode 4 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a gateway for inbound and outbound operation.
PAGE 451
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 451 of 906 In the outbound operation, the DAC drives the DTR lead OFF until another DM calls it for outbound accessing. The DAC answers the data call and drives the DTR lead ON. The calling DM is then transparently connected to the gateway. The DAC requires the gateway to drive the DCD lead to ON within 35 seconds after the outbound call is connected. Call disconnection may be initiated by dropping DCD (or DSR) from ON to OFF.
PAGE 452
Page 452 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Mode 5 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to an auto-answer gateway for inbound Hotline operation. In this mode, the DAC automatically executes Hotline operation when DCD is driven ON by the gateway. If the DM being called by the Hotline operation is busy or not answering, the DAC will place repeated Hotline calls as long as the DCD lead is ON until the called unit answers.
PAGE 453
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 453 of 906 Programing DAC for mode 6 in service change LD 11 When used for inbound or outbound gateway access, the DAC can be configured as R232 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound gateway access, the DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is programmed as station hunting, outbound gateway access should be in the opposite direction to the hunting for inbound gateway access. See Figure 92 on page 451 for more details.
PAGE 454
Page 454 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card go ON for 2 seconds and then OFF for 4 seconds until the call is answered by the host. When the host turns DTR ON, the DAC answers the call. If DM-to-DM protocol exchange is successful, the DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON. If DTR was already ON, the DAC does not drive RI ON.
PAGE 455
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 455 of 906 Dynamic control of DTR This feature is required only if the host must be capable of releasing an established call. The host should be able to drop an established data call by driving DTR OFF for more than 100 ms. Note: If the PBDO parameter in LD 11 is ON, then Make Set Busy will be activated when DTR is driven OFF for more than five seconds. In this mode, the DAC will not send any menus or prompts to the host.
PAGE 456
Page 456 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Programing DAC for mode 9 in service change LD 11 The DAC must be configured as R232 or R422 (the Autodial feature is used for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an ADM trunk. Mode 10 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a host for inbound host accessing. The host in this mode is not required to monitor RI or drive DTR.
PAGE 457
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 457 of 906 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a host and continuous Hotline operation is required. In this mode, the DAC repeatedly tries to Hotline to the Autodial DN as long as DTR is ON. When the DAC tries to Hotline to a busy Data Module, it activates Ring Again and the connection is established as soon as the called unit is free.
PAGE 458
Page 458 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 94 DAC to Terminal connectivity Terminal (DTE) DAC (DCE) pin 2 pin 3 pin 5 pin 6 pin 7 pin 8 pin 20 pin 22 >>> <<< <<< <<< <<< >>> <<< TX RX CTS DSR GND DCD DTR RI not required for mode 14 RS- 232 leads 553-5220 unless the DTR lead is driven ON by the terminal. Any terminal that drives the DTR lead ON can be used with this mode (such as VT100 or VT102).
PAGE 459
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 459 of 906 Mode 13 This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a terminal (DTE) and Hotline call origination is required. This mode is similar to the operation of the ASIM when set to not-forced-DTR and Hotline. In this mode, the terminal is able to Hotline to a specific data unit by driving the DTR lead ON. The transition of DTR from OFF to ON causes the DAC to Hotline to the Autodial DN.
PAGE 460
Page 460 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Mode 15 This mode provides a “virtual leased line” and the meaning of the “Forced DTR” switch is re-defined. This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a terminal (DTE) and continuous Hotline call origination is required. In this mode, the DAC repeatedly tries to Hotline to the Autodial DN as long as DTR is ON. This operation is similar to having a leased line feature, where the connection between two extensions is always established.
PAGE 461
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 461 of 906 Note: If AUTB is set to ON, the BAUD parameter is not prompted. If AUTB is set to OFF, you may select a fixed baud rate in response to the prompt BAUD. When the DAC receives a call, it adapts to the caller’s baud rate. See Table 158 for connect and disconnect protocol.
PAGE 462
Page 462 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 158 Connect and disconnect protocol (Part 2 of 12) Mode of operation Interface application Comments Outbound modem pooling: Local DM user calls to the outbound modem access number. DAC answers the outbound call and drives DTR ON. Modem receives DTR and prepares to receive commands. Local DM user enters the proper commands for calling the remote modem. Remote modem answers; data call established.
PAGE 463
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 463 of 906 Table 158 Connect and disconnect protocol (Part 3 of 12) Mode of operation Mode 1 Interface application Comments Inbound Hotline modem pools Inbound Hotline modem pooling: Most dumb modems can be used for this application. Modem sends ring/no ring cycle (2 seconds ON, 4 seconds OFF) to initiate connection. DAC responds by trying to establish a Hotline call to a specific Data Module (Autodial). When Data Module answers, then and only then, the DAC turns DTR ON.
PAGE 464
Page 464 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 158 Connect and disconnect protocol (Part 4 of 12) Mode of operation Mode 3 Interface application Comments Inbound Hotline modem pools (with forced DTR) Inbound Hotline modem pooling: Use this mode with Hayes 1200 modem. The DAC operation is identical to mode 1 except that DTR is always forced ON (except during disconnect). Call disconnection: Disconnection is identical to mode 2.
PAGE 465
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 465 of 906 Table 158 Connect and disconnect protocol (Part 5 of 12) Mode of operation Interface application Comments Call disconnection (DAC): DAC drops DTR if the local DM user drops the call. The Gateway must drop DCD. DAC drops DTR if the DAC receives a long break or three short breaks. The Gateway must drop DCD. Call disconnection (Gateway): Gateway drops DCD (DCD OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call.
PAGE 466
Page 466 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 158 Connect and disconnect protocol (Part 6 of 12) Mode of operation Mode 6 Interface application Comments Inbound and Outbound Gateway access (with forced DTR) Inbound and Outbound Gateway protocol: The DAC operation is identical to mode 4 except that DTR is always forced ON (except during disconnect). The establishment of the outbound call does not require DCD to be driven ON by the Gateway.
PAGE 467
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 467 of 906 Table 158 Connect and disconnect protocol (Part 7 of 12) Mode of operation Mode 8 Interface application Comments Host access for call origination and answering Host answering an incoming data call: Local DM user dials the access number to initiate the connection. DAC responds by driving RI ON for 2 seconds and OFF for 4 seconds until the Host answers by turning DTR ON. (If the Host always drives DTR ON, the DAC immediately answers the call without driving RI ON.
PAGE 468
Page 468 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 158 Connect and disconnect protocol (Part 8 of 12) Mode of operation Interface application Comments Call disconnect ion (DAC): DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the local DM user releases the call. The Host should then drop the call. DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the Host sends a long break or three short breaks. The Host should then drop the call. Call disconnection (Host): The Host toggles DTR from ON to OFF (DTR must be OFF for 100 ms or more).
PAGE 469
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 469 of 906 Table 158 Connect and disconnect protocol (Part 9 of 12) Mode of operation Mode 10 Interface application Comments Host access for call origination and answering (with forced DTR) Host access for call origination and answering: The DAC operation is identical to mode 8 except DTR is always considered ON, even when the Host is driving DTR OFF. Call disconnection: DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the local DM user releases the call. The Host should then drop the call.
PAGE 470
Page 470 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 158 Connect and disconnect protocol (Part 10 of 12) Mode of operation Mode 12 Interface application Comments Terminal access for call origination and answering Terminal answering an incoming data call: DAC drives DSR, DCD, and CTS ON in the idle state. Local DM user dials the access number to initiate the connection.
PAGE 471
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 471 of 906 Table 158 Connect and disconnect protocol (Part 11 of 12) Mode of operation Interface application Comments Call disconnection (terminal): Terminal toggles DTR from ON to OFF (DTR must be OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS OFF for 0.2 second and then ON. Terminal sends a long break or three short breaks. The DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS OFF for 0.2 second and then ON.
PAGE 472
Page 472 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 158 Connect and disconnect protocol (Part 12 of 12) Mode of operation Interface application Comments Call disconnection (DAC): If the local DM user drops the call, the DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS OFF for 0.2 second and then ON. Call disconnection (terminal): The terminal sends a long break or three short breaks. The DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS OFF for 0.2 second, and then ON.
PAGE 473
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 473 of 906 • Autoparity to ensure that the keyboard dialing menu is readable on the data terminal during the interactive dialogue mode • Originating calls to local and remote hosts • Ring Again • Speed Call • Two answer modes for incoming calls: manual and auto • Digit display • Dialing by mnemonic Initiating conditions In order for the DAC to respond to user commands/entries, the following conditions must be met: • The DAC must be active (power ON), and have su
PAGE 474
Page 474 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Prompts Call processing prompts are in upper case letters only. Other prompts consist of both upper and lower case characters, and the dialogue session depicts the actual upper/lower case letters used. All prompts are preceded by the Carriage Return and Line Feed ASCII characters (, ). Prompts requesting user input are terminated with the ASCII colon (:).
PAGE 475
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 475 of 906 Keyboard Autobaud is allowed after the call is placed in off-line mode. Note: If the Hayes autobaud characters A or a are sent, the DAC will enter Hayes dialing mode. Autobaud character detection is selected in the software. Auto parity The user can override the downloaded parity rate by entering the ASCII period (.) as a command. This period must be the only command sent, followed by .
PAGE 476
Page 476 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Whenever a Primary command is expected, the user may enter the Parity command (period). If Auto Parity has already been done, the Invalid Command menu is presented: Invalid Command/Entry Re-Enter: The user's port may be set to idle by entering CTRL Z. Any call in progress will be dropped, and any Ring Again placed will be released. Once the Primary Command menu has appeared, the user must enter C to place a call.
PAGE 477
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 477 of 906 Autodial (A) The Autodial command allows the user to dial a predefined number stored within the local system. The DAC will automatically attempt to place a data call to the Autodial number: A CALLING xxxxxxx RINGING ANSWERED CALL CONNECTED. SESSION STARTS The currently stored Autodial number may be viewed by entering the primary command D (Display), followed by the selection A (Autodial). See the Display discussion later in this document.
PAGE 478
Page 478 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card if the access code is less than the maximum number of digits allowed for the Speed Call list for the associated data DN (DDN). Note: If the Speed Call feature key is not defined in the software, you will be notified by the following: Feature key Speed Call not defined. Both the Autodial and Speed Call commands can be changed with the Modify command (M). Additionally, the Speed Call number can be changed in the service change.
PAGE 479
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 479 of 906 By entering S on the keyboard, you enter the Speed Call Modify menu. The Speed Call number can also be changed in the software. Respond to the following prompts to change the Speed Call number. S Enter access code Current Speed Call number: zzzzzzz Enter Speed Call number: zzzzzzz New Speed Call number: xxxxxxx By entering R on the keyboard, you enter the Remote Loopback Modify menu.
PAGE 480
Page 480 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card of rings. Respond to the following prompts to enable or disable the Manual Answer feature. M Current Answer Mode: Manual Auto - xx Rings Manual Answer? (Y/N): Y N Number of rings (1-255 <1>): yy New Answer Mode: Manual New Answer Mode: Auto - yy Rings By entering D on the keyboard, you enter the DCD Modify menu. Respond to the following prompts to enable DCD as Forced or Dynamic.
PAGE 481
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 481 of 906 By entering L on the keyboard, you enter the Long Break Detect Modify menu. Respond to the following prompts to enable or disable the detection of the Long Break as an abandon signal. L Long Break:Detected Ignored Detect Long Break? (Y/N): Y N Long Break: Detected Long Break: Ignored To exit the Modify menu, enter Q. This entry returns you to the Primary commands menu. To view the port's parameters, enter D when in the Primary Commands menu.
PAGE 482
Page 482 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Note: If you hang up the call, or give an abandon command, Ring Again is canceled. BUSY, RING AGAIN? (Y/N): Y or N RING AGAIN PLACED Primary Commands Menu: A - Auto Dial C - Call D - Display M - Modify S - Speed Call CTRL Z (Abort Keyboard Dialing) Select: If a Ring Again request has already been placed, the DAC offers the option of overriding the previous request.
PAGE 483
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 483 of 906 Again prompt within a software determined time period, Ring Again is canceled, and the Primary Commands Menu appears. DATA STATION NOW AVAILABLE, PLACE CALL? (Y/N/): Y CALLING XXXX RINGING ANSWERED CALL CONNECTED. SESSION STARTS Note 1: If the Ring Again notice occurs during a parameter change, the prompt only appears after the change has been completed. Note 2: If the notice occurs during an active call, the Ring Again notice is ignored.
PAGE 484
Page 484 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Not in service When the DAC attempts a call to a DN that is not supported, it sends you a message. The call is released, and you must reenter the Autobaud character to initiate keyboard dialing again. C ENTER NUMBER: xxxxxxx CALLING xxxxxxx NOT IN SERVICE RELEASED No response from the system Likewise, when the DAC receives no system response from your port after a 30-second timeout period, the DAC sends you a message. The call is abandoned.
PAGE 485
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 485 of 906 Hayes dialing Like keyboard dialing, Hayes dialing is an interactive dialing mode with the terminating equipment connected to the NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC).
PAGE 486
Page 486 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card — the DTE mode, and RI has cycled the appropriate number of times and DCD is asserted on by the modem Note: In Gateway mode, DCD must be asserted on. In modem mode, only RI must be on. The DAC asserts DTR to the modem, and awaits DCD from the modem. Input requirements All input must be in the same case (upper or lower). The Hayes repeat command, A/, is used to immediately execute the last command entered. The terminator character need not be entered.
PAGE 487
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 487 of 906 Result codes and messages Each input record generates a result code which is sent to the user. Only one code is sent regardless of the number of commands in the record. The reply is in one of two formats: • Numeric replies contain a one- or two-number code • Verbose replies contain one or more words Table 159 shows the codes for each reply in both formats, and explanations for the codes.
PAGE 488
Page 488 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 159 Hayes dialing result codes and messages (Part 2 of 2) Verbose code Numeric code Description BUSY 7 Far end is busy NO ANSWER 8 Far end does not answer CONNECT 1200 5 Session starts at 1200 baud CONNECT 2400 10 Session starts at 2400 baud CONNECT 4800 11 Session starts at 4800 baud CONNECT 9600 12 Session starts at 9600 baud CONNECT 19200 14 Session starts at 19200 baud Baud rate detection Every command line begins with Baud rate dete
PAGE 489
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 489 of 906 Note: The parity determined here overrides the parity downloaded from the system. Also, the T (t) must be entered in the same case as the A (a). If you entered uppercase A for the Baud Rate, you must enter upper case T for the parity. Dialing operation Like keyboard dialing, the Hayes dialing commands allow the user to initiate a data call, as well as change certain dialing parameters.
PAGE 490
Page 490 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 160 AT dialing commands (Part 2 of 2) Command Description ATHP Hang up voice call ATQn Result code (n = 0, 1; if n = 0, result codes are sent) ATVn Verbal result (n = 0, 1; if n = 0, numeric codes are sent) ATXn Result code selection (n = 0, 1; if n = 1, extended results) ATSn Read S register (n = number of S register to read) ATSn=x Write S register (n = S register number; x = new value) ATZ Soft reset (reset to default parameters) ATCn Carri
PAGE 491
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 491 of 906 All S registers may be changed with the exception of S1, the Ring count. If an attempt is made to change this parameter, the command is accepted but no action is taken. The Ring count is the number of 6-second intervals that have expired since an inbound call has been received. The current count may be displayed through the Display S register command but cannot be altered After a call is dropped, the Ring counter is set back to 0.
PAGE 492
Page 492 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 161 Allowable S registers (Part 2 of 2) S register Range Range units Supported Description S8 0–30 Seconds Yes Duration for the dial pause character S9 1–255 0.1 second No Carrier detect response time S10 1–255 0.
PAGE 493
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 493 of 906 Reset Hayes parameters All of the Hayes dialing parameters and S registers remain even after the data call is complete. Similarly, if the dialing mode, keyboard to Hayes or vice versa, are changed, the parameters remain as specified. The following command allows you to reset the parameters and S registers to the defaults. Entering 0 resets to the Hayes default, while entering 1 resets to the downloaded operating parameters.
PAGE 494
Page 494 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 162 Hayes parameters and S register reset values (Part 2 of 2) Parameter Value Description V 1 Result codes sent in Verbose format X 1 Features selection 0 - 8, 10 - 13 P — Dial method (pulse) S0 0 *?1 S1 0 Ring count 0 S2 43 Escape sequence character Plus sign (+) S3 13 Terminator character Carriage Return () S4 10 New line character Line Feed () S5 8 Back space character BS () S6 2 Blind dial delay 2 seconds S7 30
PAGE 495
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 495 of 906 Outbound calls The DAC supports two types of outbound data calls: • point-to-point data calls • calls sent through a modem without call origination capabilities Hayes dialing does not provide for any alterations during call processing, Ring Again, or Controlled Call Back Queueing (CCBQ) for example. Consequently, if such variances occur during the call processing, the DAC releases the call and notifies you with a NO CARRIER or BUSY result code.
PAGE 496
Page 496 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Issuing the On Hook command while the call is still ringing disconnects the incoming call. The DAC disconnects the call and notifies you with a NO CARRIER message. RING RING ATH0 NO CARRIER When the S0 register is set to 0, the DAC is set to manual answer, and an inbound call must be answered with the Answer command. You can also abandon the call with the On Hook message, as in the Autodial sequence.
PAGE 497
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 497 of 906 In the following example, is the Guard Time and the Escape Character defined in the S2 register. The example shows the Off Line escape sequence, the command to display an S register (Ring Count, in this case), and the command to go back on line and attend to the answered call.
PAGE 498
Page 498 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card System parameters System parameters downloaded by the switch include the type of system, the inactivity timer, and the data DN. These parameters are described below: • System type: CS 1000S, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 • Inactivity timeout — No timeout — 15 minutes — 30 minutes — 60 minutes • DDN: 1 to 7 digits (0–9) Operating parameters There are thirteen parameters configured in the system that are downloaded to the DAC.
PAGE 499
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 499 of 906 — Hotline (call the Autodial number upon connection) • Wire test — Disabled (can be invoked only with front panel switch) — Enabled (start only if the DAC firmware is idle) • Language — English — Quebec French • Keyboard dialing — Enabled (allow both keyboard or Hayes dialing modes) — Disabled (Hayes dialing only) • Make port busy — Disabled—On with DTR (normal) — Enabled—Off with DTR (modes 8 or 12, and no DTR for 5 seconds) • Auto Baud — Variable (use aut
PAGE 500
Page 500 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card — DCE — DTE • Equipment type — Terminal (send prompts/replies) — Host (suppress prompts/replies) • Long Break Detect In Figure 95 on page 501 and Figure 96 on page 502, the rectangles represent the settings of service change parameters in LD11 that affect the desired function. The diamonds represent the logical DAC operating mode decisions. Upload parameters The system can, at any time, request information from a DAC port.
PAGE 501
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 501 of 906 Figure 95 Operating mode selection—RS422 OPE YES Operate Mode? Terminal Host PRM = On Mode 8 and 9 No Virtual Leased Line? Yes HOT = On DTR = On DTR = Off Hotline? Mode 12 and 13 PRM = Off Yes No HOT = On HOT = Off Allow Autobaud? No Yes AUTB = On BAUD = 7 AUTB = Off Select BAUD Set remaining Operate Parameters as appropriate: par, aut, DLNG, KBD, WIRE, & PBDO 553-5221 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 502
Page 502 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 96 Operating mode selection—RS-232-C OPE YES Terminal (Modes 12, 13, 14, 15) Modem (Modes 0, 1, 2, 3) Operate Mode? Gateway (Modes 4, 5, 6, 7) DEM = DTE PRM = Off Yes Host (Modes 8, 9, 10, 11) DEM = DTE PRM = On Virtual Leased Line? Dynamic DCD? No No DCD = Off DCD = On DEM = DCE PRM = Off DEM = DCE PRM = On Yes No HOT = On DCD= Off Virtual Leased Line? Yes No Hotline? Yes HOT = Off Yes HOT = On DCD= On HOT = On DTR = On Yes No Hotli
PAGE 503
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 503 of 906 Note: Warning Tone Denied (WTD) defaults if DTA is entered. • If the DAC is used to call out through modem pooling, where the modem pool consists of dumb modems connected to QMT8 SADM or QMT12 V.35 SADM, the DAC port should be configured with a secondary DN, which has a single appearance. • The Virtual keys must be assigned as shown in Table 164.
PAGE 504
Page 504 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Power supply Be sure that all power requirements are met before installing the DAC. Operation may be affected by improper power and environmental conditions. EIA signals supported The DAC supports a subset of the standard signals. Only 8 leads can be brought through the backplane connector for each port, totaling 48 leads for each card slot. Table 165 lists the EIA signals supported on this card.
PAGE 505
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 505 of 906 Environmental The DAC functions fully when operating within the following specified conditions. See Table 166. Table 166 DAC environmental specifications Specification Operating Storage Ambient temperature 0 to 60 degrees C 40 to 70 degrees C Humidity 5% to 95% 5% to 95% Reliability The DAC has a predicted mean time between failure (MTBF) of 8 years at 45 degrees Celsius. The mean time to repair (MTTR) is 1 hour.
PAGE 506
Page 506 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Large System In Large Systems, the DAC is fully supported in IPE modules. These special slots on the DAC have 24-pair cables pre-wired to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) in card slots 0-15. Any IPE slot will support the first four ports on the DAC if connections are made at the MDF. Most IPE modules can be upgraded to wire 24-pair cables to the MDF for all card slots.
PAGE 507
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 507 of 906 An upgraded backplane has three shrouds for each card slot. A backplane that cannot be upgraded has only two shrouds for each card slot. Table 167 System option compatibility with the DAC System option Backplane code Backplane release Upgrade Maximum no.
PAGE 508
Page 508 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 97 NT7D16 Data Access Card port connectors RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 RS-232 RS-422 553-5234 Note: Insert only one option plug per port. 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 509
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 509 of 906 Cabling Several cabling schemes are possible for both AILC and RILC modes. Typical capacitance for 24- and 26-gauge cables is shown in the Tables 168 and 169. RS-232 and RS-422 transmission distance is limited by the electrical capacitance of the cable. Low-capacitance cable carries a digital signal further than a high-capacitance cable.
PAGE 510
Page 510 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 98 Cabling to the data equipment I/O connector DB25 25 pair Patch panel (12 connectors total) 25 pair System MDF RS-422 AILU RJ-11 DB25 DB25 RS-232 RJ-11 DB25 DB25 25 pair 25 pair DB25 DB25 Octopus cable DB25 553-AAA1128 DB25 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 511
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 511 of 906 Figure 99 shows a connection through an RJ-11 or RJ-45 jack located at the data station. It is recommended that four wires be used similarly to the AIM drop when using the RJ-11 jack. Another cable is required to convert the RJ-11 or RJ-45 into DB25. Note: It is necessary to turn over Receive Data and Send Data between the DAC and the AILU. This is done on the TN at the MDF.
PAGE 512
Page 512 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Figure 100 Patch panel layout 50-pin connector DB25 DB25 50-pin connector 553-5021 Note: Use an octopus cable that follows the pinout of the DAC, such as QCAD318A (female) and QCAD319A (male), in conjunction with a 50-pin female-to-female gender converter. 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 513
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 513 of 906 Figure 101 Octopus cabling TxD RxD GND DTR CTS DSR DCD RI To your data equipment EIA signals from 2 (TxD) the DAC (unit 0) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) 20 (DTR) 5 (CTS) 6 (DSR) 8 (DCD) 22 (RI) DB25 connector TxD RxD GND DTR CTS DSR DCD RI 6 DB25 connectors per 25 pair cable EIA signals from the DAC (unit 5) 2 (TxD) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) 20 (DTR) 5 (CTS) 6 (DSR) 8 (DCD) 22 (RI) DB25 connector EIA signals from the DAC (unit 5) EIA signals from the DAC (unit 0) MDF To your da
PAGE 514
Page 514 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Backplane pinout and signaling Two 40-pin, and two 20-pin edge connectors connect the card to the backplane. The detailed pinout configurations are listed in Tables 170 and 171. Table 170 RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for first three DAC ports (Part 1 of 2) I/O cable RS-232-C Pair Pin Pair color Unit no. Signal Pin no.
PAGE 515
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 515 of 906 Table 170 RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for first three DAC ports (Part 2 of 2) I/O cable RS-232-C Pair Pin Pair color 7R 7 8T Unit no. RS-422 Signal Signal Pin no.
PAGE 516
Page 516 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 171 RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for last three DAC ports (Part 1 of 2) I/O cable RS-232-C Pair Pin Pair color Unit no. Signal Pin no.
PAGE 517
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 517 of 906 Table 171 RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for last three DAC ports (Part 2 of 2) I/O cable RS-232-C Pair Pin Pair color Signal Pin no. RS-422 Signal Patch pair or octopus 22R 22 O-V GND5 7 SDB5 Connector 23T 48 V-G DCD5 8 23R 23 G-V DSR5 6 24T 49 V-BR RI5 22 24R 24 BR-V CTS5 5 Unit no. 3 Note: Units 4 and 5 are available when the DAC is installed in a fully wired 24-pair slot.
PAGE 518
Page 518 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card required. The defaults are bracketed, and may be issued by Carriage Return (). LD 11 – Configure Data Access card. (Part 1 of 3) Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW CHG MOV COPY Add, change, move or copy the unit TYPE: R232 R422 RS-232-C unit RS-422 unit TN lscu DAC data TN. The loop (LL) must be a superloop. RNPG Ringing number pickup group (default to zero) CLS TOV Class of Service allowed for the DAC.
PAGE 519
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 519 of 906 LD 11 – Configure Data Access card. (Part 2 of 3) Prompt Response Description HOT (OFF) ON Hotline If HOT = ON, then AUTB = OFF AUT (ON) OFF Automatic answer AUTB (ON) OFF Autobaud Prompt appears only if HOT - OFF BAUD 0-(7)-8 Baud rate, where: 0 = 110 1 = 150 2 = 300 3 = 600 4 = 1200 5 = 2400 6 = 4800 7 = 9600 8 = 19200 This prompt appears only if AUTB = OFF.
PAGE 520
Page 520 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card LD 11 – Configure Data Access card.
PAGE 521
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 521 of 906 Printing the card parameters (LD 20) By responding R232, R422, or DAC to the TYPE prompt in LD 20, you can print out the configured parameters for each port, or the entire DAC. This is useful to determine if any parameters have been altered during keyboard or Hayes dialing modify procedures. LD 20 – Print DAC parameters.
PAGE 522
Page 522 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Table 172 Print out example (Part 2 of 2) DBASE R-232 or R-422 UPLOAD R-232 or R-422 AUTB ON ON BAUD 9600 4800 DCD OFF OFF PRM KBD ON KBD ON DEM DCE DCE DLNG FRN FRN KBD ON ON WIRE OFF OFF PBDO OFF OFF Note: The Upload parameters are printed only when a single TN is specified.
PAGE 523
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 523 of 906 Figure 102 Macintosh to DAC connection—9-pin subminiature D System Apple Macintosh 9-pin subminiature D MDF RDA W R3 RDB BL T3 BK SDA BK R2 Y SDB Y T2 8 W 9 BL 5 4 6-wire Teladapt cord D A C 553-AAA1129 Figure 103 Macintosh to DAC connection—mini-8 DIN System Apple Macintosh Mini-8 DIN connector MDF DB25 pin # 8 RXD+ R3 RDA0 RDA 5 RXD- T3 RDB0 RDB 6 TXD+ R2 SDA0 SDA 3 TXD- T2 SDB0 SDB D A C 553-AAA1130 Circuit Card
PAGE 524
Page 524 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Large System and CS 1000M HG upgrade The DAC can be installed directly into slots 0, 4, 8, and 12 with no cabling changes. If other slots are required, the upgrade must be made. Follow this procedure to upgrade your cabling. You can upgrade the cabling segment-by-segment, or the entire module at one time. Note 1: Four NT8D81AA cable/filter assemblies are required to upgrade the entire module, one assembly per segment.
PAGE 525
NT7D16 Data Access card Page 525 of 906 Segment 2 1 Leave cable K as is in slot L8. 2 Move cable end L-3 to L9-3. 3 Remove cable M from the backplane and connect ends M-1, M-2, and M-3 to L10-1, L10-2, and L10-3. 4 Add cable N to the I/O panel by connecting ends N-1, N-2, and N-3 to L11-1, L11-2, and L11-3. Segment 3 1 Leave cable R as is in slot L12. 2 Move cable end S-3 to L13-3. 3 Remove cable T from the backplane and connect ends T-1, T-2, and T-3 to L14-1, L14-2, and L14-3.
PAGE 526
Page 526 of 906 NT7D16 Data Access card Be sure to re-label the MDF to show that the module has been upgraded to provide one cable for each IPE slot. The resulting backplane and cable arrangement should look like this: 553-3001-211 Backplane slot-connector I/O panel cable position L0 A L1 B L2 C L3 D (new cable) L4 E L5 F L6 G L7 H (new cable) L8 K L9 L L10 M L11 N (new cable) L12 R L13 S L14 T L15 U (new cable) Standard 3.
PAGE 527
544 Page 527 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Electrical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 528
Page 528 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards The Digital Line card provides 16 voice and 16 data communication links. NT8D02 Digital Line card The 32 port NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in the MG 1000S and MG 1000S Expansion. You can install this card in any IPE slot. NTDK16 Digital Line card The NTDK16 is a 48 port card supported only in the Chassis system.
PAGE 529
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Page 529 of 906 Figure 104 Digital line card – faceplate Card lock latch LED Dgtl LC NT8D02 Rlse 04 Card lock latch 553-6160 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 530
Page 530 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Functional description NT8D02 Digital Line card The NT8D02 digital line card is equipped with 16 identical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 32 addressable ports per card.
PAGE 531
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Page 531 of 906 Figure 105 Digital line card – block diagram +10 V dc Line interface units 0–7 DS-30X loop Tx PCM Rx PCM 5.
PAGE 532
Page 532 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards NTDK16 Digital Line card The NTDK16 digital line card is equipped with 48 identical units. Each unit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 96 addressable ports per card.
PAGE 533
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Page 533 of 906 Figure 106 NTDK16 DLC Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 534
Page 534 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards lines carry multiplexed PCM voice, data, and signaling information as TCM loops. The purpose of each digital line interface circuit is to de-multiplex data from the DS-30X Tx channel into eight integrated voice and data bitstreams. The circuits then transmit those bitstreams as Bi-Polar Return to Zero, Alternate Mark Inversion (BPRZ-AMI) data to the eight TCM loops.
PAGE 535
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Page 535 of 906 Card control functions Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on the digital line card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason. Microcontroller The NT8D02 Digital Line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
PAGE 536
Page 536 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly serviced, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware reset. Circuit power The +15 V dc input is regulated down to +10 V dc for use by the digital line interface circuits. The ±15.0 V dc inputs to the card are used to power the loop interface circuits. Electrical specifications This section lists the electrical characteristics of the NT8D02 Digital Line card.
PAGE 537
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Page 537 of 906 Digital line interface specifications Table 173 provides a technical summary of the digital line cards.
PAGE 538
Page 538 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Power requirements The digital line card needs +15V DC over each loop at a maximum current of 80 mA. It requires +15V, -15V, and +5V from the backplane. The line feed interface can supply power to one loop of varying length up to 1070 m (3500 ft) using 24 AWG wire with a maximum allowable AC signal loss of 15.5 dB at 256 kHz, and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms; 26 AWG wire is limited to 745 m (2450 ft).
PAGE 539
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Page 539 of 906 Environmental specifications Table 175 shows the environmental specifications of the card.
PAGE 540
Page 540 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Table 176 NT8D02 Digital Line card – backplane pinouts (Part 2 of 2) * 553-3001-211 Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations Backplane Pinout* Lead Designations 16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip 17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip 18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip 19A Line 7, Ring 19B Line 7, Tip 62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8, Tip 63A Line 9, Ring 63B Line 9, Tip 64A Line 10, Ring 64B Line 10, Tip 65A Line 11, Ring 65B Line 11,
PAGE 541
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Page 541 of 906 Configuration This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D02 Digital Line card and configuring the system software to properly recognize the card. Figure 107 on page 542 shows where the switches and jumper blocks are located on this board. Jumper and switch settings The NT8D02 Digital Line card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches.
PAGE 542
Page 542 of 906 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Figure 107 Digital line card – jumper block and switch locations 553-6161 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 543
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Page 543 of 906 Figure 108 Digital line card – jumper block and switch locations 553-6161 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 544
Page 544 of 906 553-3001-211 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards Standard 3.
PAGE 545
546 Page 545 of 906 NT8D03 Analog Line card Overview The NT8D03 Analog Line card provides an interface for up to 16 analog (500/2500-type) telephones. It is equipped with an 8051-family microprocessor that performs the following functions: • control of card operation • card identification • self-test • status reporting to the controller • maintenance diagnostics You can install this card in any IPE slot. Note: A maximum of four NT8D03 Analog Line cards can be installed in each MG 1000S.
PAGE 546
Page 546 of 906 553-3001-211 NT8D03 Analog Line card Standard 3.
PAGE 547
564 Page 547 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 Connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 548
Page 548 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Note: A maximum of four NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line cards per MG 1000S and four NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line cards per MG 1000S Expansion are supported. Cards later than vintage NT8D09AK support µ-Law and A-Law companding, and provide a 2 dB transmission profile change. The transmission change improves performance on long lines, particularly for lines used outside of a single-building environment.
PAGE 549
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Page 549 of 906 Table 177 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card application and compatibility (Part 2 of 2) (Continued) Equipment Specifications interdigital time 40 ms speed 12.5 digits/s Physical description The circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm. by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card circuits connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector.
PAGE 550
Page 550 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Figure 109 Analog message waiting line card – faceplate Card lock latch LED Anlg M/WL C NT8D09 Rlse 0x Card lock latch 553-6165 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 551
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Page 551 of 906 The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card also provides: • 600 ohms balanced terminating impedance • analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission and reception signals for 16 audio phone lines • transmission and reception of Scan and Signaling Device (SSD) signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling channel in A10 format • on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash detection • 20 Hz ringing signal connection and auto
PAGE 552
Page 552 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Figure 110 Analog message waiting line card – block diagram Line interface units 0–3 Codec Analog XFMR hybrid Signaling relays (ringing, battery reversal) Loop current/ dialpulse detect PCM Tip Ring Analog telephone lines Message waiting Line interface units 4–7 Codec PCM Input/output interface control Address/ data bus Analog XFMR hybrid Signaling relays (ringing, battery reversal) Loop current/ dialpulse detect Tip Ring Analog telephone l
PAGE 553
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Page 553 of 906 Card interfaces The analog message waiting line card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in “Intelligent Peripheral Equipment” on page 32. Line interface units The analog message waiting line card contains 16 identical and independently configurable line interface units (also referred to as circuits).
PAGE 554
Page 554 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Card control functions Control functions are provided by the following: • a microcontroller • a card LAN interface • signaling and control circuits on the analog message waiting line card Microcontroller The analog message waiting line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
PAGE 555
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Page 555 of 906 Analog line interface Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of: • 20 dB for 200-500 Hz • 26 dB for 500-3400 Hz Insertion loss On a station line-to-line connection, the total insertion loss at 1 kHz is 6 dB + 1 dB. This is arranged as 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM, and 2.5 dB loss for PCM to analog. Frequency response The loss values in Table 178 are measured relative to the loss at 1 kHz.
PAGE 556
Page 556 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Table 179 provides a technical summary of the analog message waiting line card. Table 179 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card technical summary Impedance 600 ohms Loop limit (excluding set) 1000 ohms at nominal -48 V (excluding set) Leakage resistance 30,000 ohms Ring trip During silent or ringing intervals Ringing voltage 86 V AC Signaling Loop start Supervision Normal battery conditions are continuously applied (approximately -44.
PAGE 557
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Page 557 of 906 Power requirements Table 180 provides the power requirements for the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card. Table 180 Power requirements Voltage (+/-) Tolerance Idle current Active current Max + 12.0 V dc 0.36 V dc 48 mA 0 mA 48 mA + 8.0 V dc 0.40 V dc 150 mA 8 mA 280 mA –48.0 V dc 2.00 V dc 48 mA 40 mA 688 mA –48.0 V dc 5.00 V dc 0 mA 10 mA (Note 1) 320 mA 86.0 V ac 5.00 V ac 0 mA 10 mA (Note 2) 160 mA –150.0 V dc 3.
PAGE 558
Page 558 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Overload level Signal levels exceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion in speech transmission. Environmental specifications Table 181 lists the environmental specifications for the analog message waiting line card.
PAGE 559
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Page 559 of 906 Installation and Configuration (553-3021-210) for cable pinout information at the I/O panel.
PAGE 560
Page 560 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Figure 111 Analog message waiting line card – typical cross connection example System Cross-connect OPS or ONS telephone connections with message waiting lamps NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D09 Message Waiting Line Card Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 2 Slot 0 Module I/O Panel Connector A 0T 0R 1T 1R 2T 2R 3T 3R 4T 4R 5T 5R Unit 3 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 MDF Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring (W-BL) (BL-W) (W-O) (O-W) (W-G) (G-W) (W-BR) (BR-W)
PAGE 561
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Page 561 of 906 Configuration This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card and configuring the system software to properly recognize the card. Figure 112 on page 563 shows where the switches and jumper blocks are located on this board. Jumper and switch settings The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches.
PAGE 562
Page 562 of 906 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card the system for port-to-port loss. See Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for LD 97 service change instructions. Table 183 Transmission Profile Changes 553-3001-211 Vintage A/D convertor gain D/A convertor gain Previous to AK –3.5 dB –2.5 dB AK and later –3.5 dB –0.5 dB Standard 3.
PAGE 563
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Page 563 of 906 Figure 112 Analog message waiting line card – jumper block and switch locations 553-6166 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 564
Page 564 of 906 553-3001-211 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card Standard 3.
PAGE 565
626 Page 565 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 566
Page 566 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card interfaces eight analog trunk lines to the system. Each trunk interface is independently configured by software control using the Trunk Administration program LD 14. You can install this card in any IPE slot. Note: Each MG 1000S can contain up to four analog trunk cards. Each MG 1000S Expansion can contain up to four analog trunk cards.
PAGE 567
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 567 of 906 Table 184 lists the signaling and trunk types supported by the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.
PAGE 568
Page 568 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode (LED). See Figure 113 on page 569. When an NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test is successful, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED flashes continuously or remains weakly lit, replace the card.
PAGE 569
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 569 of 906 Figure 113 Universal trunk card – faceplate Card lock latch LED Univ Trk S This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card NT8D14 Rlse 0x Card lock latch 553-6195 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 570
Page 570 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Functional description Figure 114 shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.
PAGE 571
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 571 of 906 Card interfaces The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are described in “Intelligent Peripheral Equipment” on page 32. Trunk interface units The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contains eight identical and independently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits).
PAGE 572
Page 572 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Card control functions Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface, and signaling and control circuits on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card. Microcontroller The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card.
PAGE 573
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 573 of 906 provides the means for analog loop terminations to establish, supervise, and take down call connections. Signaling interface All trunk signaling messages are three bytes long. The messages are transmitted in channel zero of the DS-30X in A10 format. Configuration information for the Universal Trunk card is downloaded from the CPU at power-up or by command from maintenance programs. Eleven configuration messages are sent.
PAGE 574
Page 574 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 115 Loop start call states – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring CO / FX / WATS (far) end High-resistance loop Near end disconnects Idle Forced far end disconnect Near end disconnects first (Note 3) Low-resistance loop Dial tone after far end timeout Far end disconnects first (Note 2) Near end answers, ringing is removed (Note 1) Far end originates by ringing Note 1: The originating office may reverse
PAGE 575
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 575 of 906 Figure 116 Loop start call connection sequence – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS A Near end Far end Meridian 1 CO State Idle Signal/direction Ringing Call presented to console loop key 2-way voice connection A goes on hook Idle B goes on hook Idle Remarks Ground on tip/ battery on ring Highresistance loop Trunk seizure Console answers B Ringing signal is superimposed on battery by the CO upon seizure.
PAGE 576
Page 576 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 117 Ground start call states – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS System (near) end Tip open, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring CO / FX / WATS (far) end High-resistance loop Idle Low-resistance loop Near end disconnects Far end disconnects far end disconnects first Near end disconnects first (Note 2) Ringing Far end originates Assignment to loop key Near end answers, ringing is removed (Note 1) Note 1: The far end may reverse battery
PAGE 577
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 577 of 906 Figure 118 Ground start call connection sequence – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS A Near end Far end Meridian 1 CO State Idle Trunk seizure Call presented to console loop key Console answers 2-way voice connection B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Idle Signal/direction Highresistance loop B Remarks Tip open/ battery on ring Ground on tip Ringing Low-resistance loop CO grounds tip.
PAGE 578
Page 578 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Ground start operation Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through software download messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring lead. Incoming calls In an incoming call, after ground is detected on the tip, the universal trunk card scans for a ringing detection signal before presenting the call to an attendant and tripping the ringing.
PAGE 579
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 579 of 906 Figure 119 Ground start call states – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS System (near) end Tip open, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring CO / FX / WATS (far) end High-resistance loop Idle Low-resistance loop Near end disconnects far end disconnects first Far end disconnects Near end disconnects first (Note 2) Near end answers, ringing is removed (Note 1) Ringing Far end originates Assignment to loop key Note 1: The far end may reverse battery
PAGE 580
Page 580 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 120 Ground start call connection sequence – incoming call from CO/FX/WATS A Near end Far end System State CO Signal/direction Highresistance loop Idle Ringing Call presented to console loop key Low-resistance loop Tip open/ battery on ring B goes on hook High-resistance loop A goes on hook CO grounds tip. Near end detects the ground and makes the trunk busy to all outgoing calls. Ringing is superimposed on battery by the CO.
PAGE 581
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 581 of 906 reverse-wired trunk becomes correctly wired, the first subsequent call clears the threshold counter and normal ground start processing is implemented. Note 1: The far-end can reverse battery and ground upon receipt of attendant answer. Note 2: The near-end provides a high-impedance (>150k ohms) disconnect signal of at least 50 ms before reconnecting the ground detector. Outgoing calls For outgoing calls, the trunk provides a ground to the ring lead.
PAGE 582
Page 582 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 121 Ground start call states – outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS System (near) end Ground on ring Forced far end disconnect Near end originates Dial tone Near end disconnects first Near end disconnects first Far end disconnects first Loop pulsing or DTMF Ringing and ringback tone CO toll denial Ground on ring, battery on tip Low-resistance loop Forced near end disconnect Idle Battery on ring, ground on tip CO / FX / WATS (far) end Battery on ring
PAGE 583
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 583 of 906 Figure 122 Ground start call connection sequence – outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS A Near end Far end System State Idle Trunk seizure Dial tone from CO B rings 2-way voice connection B goes on hook Idle A goes on hook Idle B CO Signal/direction Remarks Tip open/ battery on ring Highresistance loop Ground on ring Terminal A dials trunk access code. CE sends a Ground on tip/ message via the data output bus to ground the ring.
PAGE 584
Page 584 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Direct inward dial operation Incoming calls An incoming call from the CO places a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 123 on page 585 and Figure 124 on page 586. Dial pulses or DTMF tones are then presented from the CO. When the called party answers, the universal trunk card reverses battery and ground on the tip and ring leads to the CO. The trunk is arranged for first party release.
PAGE 585
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 585 of 906 Figure 123 DID trunk, loop DR call states – incoming call from CO System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Battery on tip, ground on ring Idle High-resistance loop Forced near end disconnect CO (far) end Low-resistance loop Far end disconnects first Forced far end disconnect Near end disconnects first Battery-ground or loop pulsing or DTMF (Note) Near end answers Far end originates Note: The near end may be configured for immediate start, delay
PAGE 586
Page 586 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 124 DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence – incoming call from CO A Near end Far end System CO Signal/direction State Ground on tip/ battery on ring Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing A rings 2-way voice connection B goes on hook A goes on hook Remarks Highresistance loop Low-resistance loop CO places a low resistance between tip and ring. Near end detects increase in loop current and makes trunk busy to all outgoing calls.
PAGE 587
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 587 of 906 Figure 125 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – incoming call from far-end PBX System (near) end Battery on tip, ground on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring Far end hangs up (Note) Low-resistance loop High-resistance loop Far end PBX Ground on tip, battery on ring Idle Far end originates Battery-ground or loop pulse, or DTMF Near end answers (ans sup) Near end answers (no ans sup) Near end disconnects first Far end disconnects first Far end di
PAGE 588
Page 588 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 126 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence – incoming call from far-end PBX A Near end Far end System System State Signal/direction B Remarks Ground on tip/ Ground on tip/ battery on ring battery on ring Idle Low-resistance loop Trunk seizure Far end places a low resistance between tip and ring. Near end detects increase in loop current and makes trunk busy to all outgoing calls.
PAGE 589
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 589 of 906 Outgoing calls In an outgoing call configuration, the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is connected to an existing PBX by a tie trunk. See Figure 127 on page 590 and Figure 128 on page 591. An outgoing call from the near-end seizes the trunk facility by placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. Outward addressing is then applied from the System in the form of DTMF tones or dial pulses.
PAGE 590
Page 590 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 127 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring High-resistance loop Near end disconnects first Idle Battery-ground or loop pulse or DTMF Near end originates Far end answers (no ans sup) Near end hangs up (Note) Battery on tip, ground on ring Far end PBX Low-resistance loop Far end answers (ans sup) Near end disconnects Far end disconnec
PAGE 591
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 591 of 906 Figure 128 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence – outgoing call to far-end PBX A Near end Far end System PBX State Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing Signal/direction B Remarks Ground on tip/ Ground on tip/ battery on ring battery on ring Low-resistance loop Address signaling B rings Battery on tip/ ground on ring 2-way voice connection When terminal A goes off hook, near end places a low resistance between tip and ring.
PAGE 592
Page 592 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 129 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring High-resistance loop Near end disconnects first Idle Battery-ground or loop pulse or DTMF Near end originates Far end answers (no ans sup) Near end hangs up (Note) Battery on tip, ground on ring Far end PBX Low-resistance loop Far end answers (ans sup) Near end disconnects Far end disconnec
PAGE 593
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 593 of 906 Figure 130 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence – outgoing call to far-end PBX A Near end Far end System PBX State Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing Signal/direction B Remarks Ground on tip/ Ground on tip/ battery on ring battery on ring Low-resistance loop Address signaling B rings Battery on tip/ ground on ring 2-way voice connection When terminal A goes off hook, near end places a low resistance between tip and ring.
PAGE 594
Page 594 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Senderized operation for DID and two-way loop DR trunks Incoming calls If the far-end is senderized, the near-end can operate in any mode: Immediate Start (IMM), Delay Dial (DDL) or Wink (WNK) start, as assigned at the STRI prompt in the Trunk Administration program LD 14. See Figure 131 on page 595. Note: If a ground start trunk, the outpulse towards office occurs after ground detection.
PAGE 595
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 595 of 906 Figure 131 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Idle Far end hangs up (Note 4) Ground on tip, battery on ring Low-resistance loop High-resistance loop Far end PBX Battery on tip, ground on ring Far end originates Battery-ground or loop pulsing, or DTMF (Note 1) CO end answers (no ans sup) Near end stores office DN (Note 2) CO/FX/WATS
PAGE 596
Page 596 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 132 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/WATS trunk System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Idle Low-resistance loop Ground on tip, battery on ring Far end hangs up (Note 4) Far end originates Battery-ground or loop pulsing, or DTMF (Note 1) CO end answers (no ans sup) High-resistance loop Far end PBX Battery on tip, ground on ring Near end stores office DN (Note 2) CO/FX/WAT
PAGE 597
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 597 of 906 Note: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided by near-end at expiration of end-of-dial timer. Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination. Outgoing automatic, incoming dial operation Incoming calls When the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is seized by the far-end on an incoming call, a low-resistance loop is placed across the tip and ring leads.
PAGE 598
Page 598 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 133 Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states – outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Ground on tip, battery on ring High-resistance loop Battery-ground Near end or loop pulses, disconnects first or DTMF Idle (Note 1) Near end originates Near end hangs up (Note 3) Far end answers (no ans sup) (Note 2) Dial tone Go (Note 2) Far end answers Stop (ans sup) Battery on tip, ground on ring Far
PAGE 599
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 599 of 906 Figure 134 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states – incoming call from far-end PBX System (near) end Ground on tip, battery on ring Forced near end disconnects Low-resistance loop Far end disconnects first Far end disconnect Far end High-resistance loop Idle Battery on tip, ground on ring Near end disconnects first Battery-ground or loop pulses, or DTMF Near end answers Far end originates 553-AAA1145 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 600
Page 600 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 135 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence – incoming call from far-end PBX A Near end Far end System PBX Signal/direction State Ground on tip/ battery on ring Idle Trunk seizure Outpulsing A rings 2-way voice connection B goes on hook A goes on hook Remarks Highresistance loop Low-resistance loop Far end PBX seizes trunk by placing a low resistance between tip and ring.
PAGE 601
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 601 of 906 Figure 136 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states – outgoing call to far-end PBX System (near) end Battery on tip, ground on ring Near end originates Idle Near end disconnect Far end disconnect Far end disconnects first Low-resistance loop Far end High-resistance loop Ground on tip, battery on ring Near end disconnects first Far end answers 553-AAA1147 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 602
Page 602 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 137 Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence – outgoing call to far-end PBX A Near end Far end System PBX State Signal/direction Ground on tip/ battery on ring Idle Trunk seizure 2-way voice connection B Remarks Highresistance loop Battery on tip/ ground on ring Low-resistance loop Terminal A goes off hook and dials access code. Near end reverses battery and ground on tip and ring, alerting far end.
PAGE 603
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 603 of 906 Recorded announcement trunk operation Note: Refer to “Multi-Channel RAN modes” on page 605 for information on Multi-Channel RAN modes, which are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. When configured for Recorded Announcement (RAN) operation, a trunk unit is connected to a customer-provided recorded announcement machine. Announcement machines must be compatible with RAN trunks. Use the manufacturer’s instructions to set up the Announcement machines.
PAGE 604
Page 604 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 138 Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical) System Cross connect Typical customerprovided external equipment NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Slot 0 MDF A 0T 0R Unit 0 Module I/O Panel Connector 0CP 0MB 26 1 27 2 Announcer (W-BL) Audio pair (BL-W) (W-O) Signal pair (O-W) Part of 25-pair cable Unit 1 Parallel trunk connection (Note 2) Unit 7 T Ref R Voice signal Control relay Busy relay Par
PAGE 605
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 605 of 906 RAN modes of operation Figure 139 on page 606 shows the relationship of control signals to message playback for the operating modes available in announcement machines. The signal names shown in Figure 139 are typical. Note 1: For continuous operation mode, connect the trunk unit MB line to the announcer B line only, and ground the announcer ST+ line.
PAGE 606
Page 606 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Figure 139 RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE) Ground ST+ Open ST+ input to announcer hardwired to ground Play Message Idle Ground C Open 250 ms reset 250 ms pulse at end of message — Continuous operation mode — Ground ST+ Open Play Message Idle Ground C Open Intermediate ST+ pulses ignored 250 ms pulse starts message Start Message plays End to completion 250 ms pulse at start of message 250 ms pulse at end of message — Pulse start/Level contr
PAGE 607
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 607 of 906 Trunk members are provisioned in the Trunk Data Block LD 14. Refer to “Programming RAN trunks” on page 608 and to Software Input/ Output: Administration (553-3001-311) for instructions on service change programs. Continuous operation mode In the continuous operation mode (sometimes called the Audichron mode), a message is constantly played, over and over again. Callers “barge in” on a playing message or receive a ringback tone until the message plays again.
PAGE 608
Page 608 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Call routing to RAN trunks CS 1000 Release 4.5 software controls recorded announcement machines. These programs detect the calls to be intercepted, determine the type of intercept treatment required (for example, overflow, attendant, announcement), queue the intercept, and provide ringback tone to the calling party. At the proper time, an intercepted call is connected to the appropriate RAN trunk.
PAGE 609
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 609 of 906 Electrical specifications Table 185 gives the electrical characteristics of the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.
PAGE 610
Page 610 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 185 Universal trunk card – trunk interface electrical characteristics (Part 2 of 2) Trunk Types Characteristic CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging Line leakage Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground N/A N/A AC induction rejection 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground N/A N/A Selected in software.
PAGE 611
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 611 of 906 Foreign and surge voltage protection The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements. Environmental specifications Table 187 lists the environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.
PAGE 612
Page 612 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card The class-of-service determines the operation of the switchable PADs contained in each unit.
PAGE 613
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 613 of 906 The insertion loss from IPE ports to IPE ports is as follows: Table 188 Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB) IPE Ports 500/2500 Line Digital Line 2/4 Wire E&M Trunk 4 Wire (ESN) E&M Trunk CO/FX /WATS Loop Tie Trunk 2.5 0 0.5 0 0.5 0 -3.5 0 -0.5 0.
PAGE 614
Page 614 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Connector pin assignments The universal trunk card connects the eight analog trunks to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. Telephone trunks connect to the universal trunk card at the back of the MG 1000S using a 25-pin connector. A list of the connections to the universal trunk card is shown in Table 189 on page 614.
PAGE 615
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 615 of 906 Table 189 Universal trunk card – backplane pinouts (Part 2 of 2) Signal Trunk Number Backplane Pin RAN mode Paging mode 7 68A Tip 69A CP Signal Other modes Backplane Pin RAN mode Paging mode Other modes Tip Tip 68B Ring Ring Ring A N/A 69B MB RG N/A Configuration The trunk type for each unit on the card as well as its terminating impedance and balance network configuration is selected by software service change entries at the system ter
PAGE 616
Page 616 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 190 Jumper strap settings – factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) 0–1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 1–2 DID 0–600 ohms Off Off 1–2 1–2 RAN: continuous operation mode Not applicable: RAN and paging trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 1–2 1–2 Trunk types Loop length CO/FX/WATS 2-way TIE (LDR) 2-way TIE (OAID) Paging Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.
PAGE 617
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 617 of 906 Table 191 Jumper strap settings – extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB) Jumper strap settings (Note 1) J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X (Note 2) > 1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 2–3 DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3 RAN: pulse start or level start modes Not applicable: RAN trunks should not leave the building. Off Off 2–3 1–2 Trunk types Loop length CO/FX/WATS 2-way TIE (LDR) 2-way TIE (OAID) Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.
PAGE 618
Page 618 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 192 Trunk types – termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) Terminating impedance (Note 1) Trunk types 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) CO/FX/WATS 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2 2-way TIE (LDR) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2 2-way TIE (OAID) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2 DID (loop length < 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3
PAGE 619
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 619 of 906 • DID trunks exceeding a loop resistance of 600 ohms • RAN trunks operating in pulse start or level start modes Figure 140 on page 620 shows jumper locations on the universal trunk card (vintage BA). Service change entries The trunk type, terminating impedance, and balance network are selected by making service change entries in the Trunk Administration program LD 14. See Table 193 on page 621 for the proper values for the trunk type and loop length.
PAGE 620
553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 August 2005 3 3 J1.5 J2.5 J3.4 1 1 1 1 J3.4 J4.4 J4.5 3 3 J1.4 J2.4 Unit 7 Unit 5 Unit 6 Unit 4 J1.7 J2.7 J4.7 1 3 1 3 J3.7 J1.6 J2.6 J4.6 1 3 1 3 J3.6 J3.1 J4.1 3 3 J3.0 J4.0 J2.0 3 3 J1.1 J2.1 1 1 J1.0 1 1 Unit 0 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 3 1 1 1 1 3 3 J1.3 J2.3 J3.2 J4.2 3 3 J1.2 J2.2 J3.3 J4.
PAGE 621
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 621 of 906 Table 193 Trunk types – termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB) Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2) Trunk types Terminating impedance (Note 1) 0–915 m (0–3000 ft) 915–1524 m (3000–5000 ft) > 1524 m (> 5000 ft) CO/FX/WATS 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2 2-way TIE (LDR) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2 2-way TIE (OAID) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2 DID (loop length < 600 ohms) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3
PAGE 622
Page 622 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Table 194 Cable loop resistance and loss Cable loop loss (dB) (nonloaded at 1kHz) Cable loop resistance (ohms) Cable length 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 915 m (3000 ft.) 97 155 251 0.9 1.2 1.5 1524 m (5000 ft.) 162 260 417 1.6 2.0 2.5 2225 m (7300 ft.) 236 378 609 2.3 3.0 3.7 3566 m (11700 ft.) 379 607 977 3.7 4.8 6.0 5639 m (18500 ft.) 600 960 1544 5.9 7.6 9.
PAGE 623
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 623 of 906 trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire non-VNL facility. • NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or when impedance compensation is not provided.
PAGE 624
Page 624 of 906 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Applications The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks. Paging trunk operation A universal trunk card unit can be configured as a paging trunk. Configure units as paging trunks in the Trunk Data Block program LD 14 and assign routes in the Route Data Block program LD 16.
PAGE 625
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Page 625 of 906 Figure 141 Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical) System Cross connect Typical customerprovided external equipment NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Bat Module I/O Panel Slot 0 Connector 0R 0A 0PG Unit 1 26 1 27 2 K1 (w-bl) (bl-w) Bat MDF A 0T Unit 0 K1 Audio pair Tape recorder, radio, etc.
PAGE 626
Page 626 of 906 553-3001-211 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card Standard 3.
PAGE 627
666 Page 627 of 906 NT8D15 E& M Trunk card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 628
Page 628 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Note: In Cabinet systems equipped with Meridian Mail, the Universal Trunk line card cannot be installed in slot 10 of the main cabinet. The NT8D15 E&M trunk card supports the following types of trunks: • 2-wire E&M Type I signaling trunks • two-wire dial repeating trunks • two or four wire tie trunks • 4-wire E&M trunks: — Type I or Type II signaling — duplex (DX) signaling • paging (PAG) trunks Type I signaling uses two signaling wires plus ground.
PAGE 629
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 629 of 906 Physical description The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The E&M trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. External equipment connects to the card at the back of the MG 1000S using a 25-pin connector.
PAGE 630
Page 630 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Figure 142 E&M trunk card – faceplate Card lock latch LED E&M Dict Trk S This symbol indicates that field-selectable jumper strap settings are located on this card NT8D15 Rlse 05 Card lock latch 553-6199 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 631
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 631 of 906 Functional description The NT8D15 E&M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements. The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A-Law or µ-Law companding modes. The mode of operation is set by service change entries. Figure 143 on page 632 shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the E&M trunk card. Each of these functions is discussed on the following pages.
PAGE 632
Page 632 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Figure 143 E&M trunk card – block diagram Input/output interface control Address/ data bus Trunk interface units 0–3 Front panel LED Codec Microcontroller Backplane Analog XFMR hybrid PCM Signaling relays (ringing, battery reversal) Card slot address Loop current/ dialpulse detect Card LAN interface Tip/ring (2/4 wire) Voice band E&M Sup.
PAGE 633
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 633 of 906 Card interfaces The E&M trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. The E&M trunk card contains four identical and independently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each unit provides impedance matching and a balance network in a signal transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Also provided are relays for placing outgoing call signaling onto the trunk.
PAGE 634
Page 634 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Trunk circuit features Trunk unit functions The functions provided by each unit on the E&M trunk card include 2-wire signaling, 4-wire signaling, and paging operation as follows: • 2-wire, E&M Type I signaling (see Figure 144 on page 635) with: — near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead — ground detection with E lead — voice transmission through tip and ring for transmit and receive • 4-wire, E&M Type I and II signaling (see Figure 145 on page 636), 2-way dial r
PAGE 635
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 635 of 906 Figure 144 E&M Type I signaling E&M trunk card Ð 48V Ð 48V External signaling circuit E E M M 553-6258 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 636
Page 636 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Figure 145 E&M Type II signaling SG SG P Ð 48V E E M M Ð 48V P SB SB Note: M, SB, E, and SG designations are Electronic Industries Association and Telecommunications Industries Association (EIA/TIA) conventions. These leads are also known as MB, MA, EA, and EB, respectively. 553-6259 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 637
600Ω 370Ω 400Ω R 250Ω 370Ω A or D1 1kΩ 370Ω See Note 5 4µF 6µF 370Ω A1 See Note 5 B1 b Ring B a Tip B b Ring A a Tip A External loop (5kΩ max.) T1 4µF T2 (Note 2) J3 1.21kΩ 1.
PAGE 638
Page 638 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Figure 147 Paging trunk operation System Cross connect Typical customerprovided external equipment NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card Bat Module I/O Panel Slot 0 Connector 0R 0A 0PG 26 1 27 2 K1 (W-BL) (BL-W) Bat MDF A 0T Unit 0 K1 Audio pair Tape recorder, radio, etc.
PAGE 639
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 639 of 906 Card control functions Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and signaling and control circuits on the E&M trunk card. Microcontroller The E&M trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the card.
PAGE 640
Page 640 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Signaling interface All signaling messages for the trunk are three bytes long. The messages are transmitted in channel zero of the DS30X in A10 format. Configuration information for the E & M trunk is downloaded from the CPU at power up and by command from maintenance programs. Seven configuration messages are sent. One message is sent to each unit (4) to configure trunk type, signaling type, balance impedance etc.
PAGE 641
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 641 of 906 • monitor signals from the trunk interface and generate a message when required for each state change • control disabling and enabling of unit or card • control A-Law and µ-Law operation modes • control transmission pad settings Maintenance features The following features are provided for maintenance of the E&M trunk: • indication of card status from self-test • software enable and disable capability for individual units or entire card • loopback of PCM s
PAGE 642
Page 642 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Figure 148 Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E&M and CO trunks Near end PBX (senderized) Far end PBX CO Outgoing PBX-CO trunk Tie trunk Incoming E&M CO/FX/ WATS 553-6262 Idle state For E&M signaling, in the idle state the M lead is ground and the E lead is an open circuit. Outgoing calls are processed as follows: • The M lead changes from ground to battery.
PAGE 643
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 643 of 906 Figure 149 E&M Type I signaling patterns – originating party release Near end M lead Ground Near end seizes DT Dialing Open Far end disc Near end disc Ground Near end E lead Idle Battery Near end disc first Far end answers (no ans sup) Far end disc first Far end answers (ans sup) Outgoing calls from near end Near end M lead Ground Near end disc Open Far end disc Far end disc first Dialing Ground Near end E lead Idle Battery Near end disc first F
PAGE 644
Page 644 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Figure 150 E&M Type I signaling patterns – originating party release on a tandem connection Near end M lead Ground Battery Near end seizes Open Dial CO/ FX/WATS Go Stored office DN digits outpulsed after GO signal O/G tie trunk disc Far end disc Ground Near end E lead Idle Far end disc first O/G tie trunk disc first Stop Universal service provided by far end PBX if originating end is senderized Far end ans Outgoing calls from near end Near end M lead Gro
PAGE 645
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 645 of 906 Incoming calls The far-end initiates calls as follows: • The ground is placed on the E lead in E&M signaling. • Dial pulses are subsequently applied from the far-end as ground open on the E lead. • If the far-end is equipped for sending, the system can operate in any mode (immediate start, delay dial, or wink start), as assigned on a start arrangement basis. See Table 197. — In immediate start mode, there is no start signal from the called office.
PAGE 646
Page 646 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card for a tandem connection where the originating end is senderized and the route is over a CO trunk (CCSA not applicable). Type II signaling uses four leads: M, SB, E, and SG. Instead of changes of state between battery and ground (M signals) or open and ground (E signals), the trunk signals by closing the contacts between the lead pairs M and SB. Signals are received by detecting current flow between lead pairs E and SG.
PAGE 647
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 647 of 906 Figure 151 E&M Type II signaling patterns – originating party release Near end M/SB leads Open Near DT end seizes Dialing Open Far end disc Closed Near end EA/EB leads Idle Closed System end disc Near end disc first Far end answers (no ans sup) Far end disc first Far end answers (ans sup) Outgoing calls from system (near end) Near end M/SB leads Open Near end disc Open Far end disc Far end disc first Dialing Closed Near end EA/EB leads Idle Closed
PAGE 648
Page 648 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Figure 152 E&M Type II signaling patterns – originating party release on a tandem connection Near end M/SB leads Open Closed Near end seizes Open Near end EA/EB leads Idle Dial CO/ FX/WATS Go Stored office DN digits outpulsed after GO signal O/G tie trunk disc Closed Far end disc Far end disc first O/G tie trunk disc first Stop Universal service provided by far end PBX if originating end is senderized Far end ans Outgoing calls from system (near end) Ne
PAGE 649
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 649 of 906 Table 198 and Table 199 show call-connection and take-down sequencing for DX signaling. Table 200 on page 650 and Table 201 on page 651 show sequencing where the E&M trunk card is used in a tandem PBX.
PAGE 650
Page 650 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Table 199 DX signaling – incoming calls with originating party release (Part 2 of 2) Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Far-end on hook first Current flow High Network taken down and trunk idled No current flow High Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High Table 200 DX signaling – outgoing calls with originating party release on tandem connections (Part 1 of 2
PAGE 651
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 651 of 906 Table 200 DX signaling – outgoing calls with originating party release on tandem connections (Part 2 of 2) Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Near end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low Far end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High Table 201 DX signaling – incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections (Part 1 of 2) Condition Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector Idle No curre
PAGE 652
Page 652 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Table 201 DX signaling – incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections (Part 2 of 2) Current in signaling lead State of trunk detector If no answer supervision: CO end disconnects (if a CO ground start – the trunk is idled and network taken down, but the incoming TIE trunk is held under control of the originating end) Current flow Low Originating end disconnects – network taken down and trunk idled No current flow High Condition Note: *
PAGE 653
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 653 of 906 Table 202 Electrical characteristics of E&M trunk cards (Part 2 of 2) Characteristic 4-wire trunk 2-wire trunk Effective loss See pad table (Table 209 on page 662) See pad table (Table 209 on page 662) Terminating impedance 600 ohms 600 ohms Balance impedance N/A 600 ohms Table 203 Electrical characteristics of trunk cards Characteristic DID Trunk CO trunk Nominal impedance 600 or 900 ohms, (selected by software) 600 or 900 ohms, (selected by software
PAGE 654
Page 654 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Power requirements Table 204 lists the power requirements for the E&M trunk card. Table 204 Power requirements Voltage Tolerance Max current +15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA –15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA +8.5 V dc ±2% 200 mA –48.0 V dc ±5 % 415 mA Environmental specifications Table 205 provides the environmental specifications for the E&M trunk card.
PAGE 655
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 655 of 906 Connector pin assignments The E&M trunk card brings the four analog trunks to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud.The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables. Telephone trunks connect to the E&M trunk card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 153 on page 657.
PAGE 656
Page 656 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Table 207 E&M trunk card – backplane pinouts for 4-wire modes 4-wire Type I Mode 4-wire Type II Mode Trunk Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 0 12B TA 12A TB 12B TA 12A TB 13B RA 13A RB 13B RA 13A RB 14B E 14A M 14B EA 14A EB 15B ECG 15A ESCG 15B MA 15A MB 16B TA 16A TB 16B TA 16A TB 17B RA 17A RB 17B RA 17A RB 18B E 18A M 18B EA 18A EB 19B ECG 19A ESCG 19B MA 19A MB 62B TA 6
PAGE 657
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 657 of 906 Figure 153 E&M trunk card – typical cross connection example System Cross connect NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D15 E&M Trunk Card Slot 0 Unit 0 Unit 1 Module I/O Panel Connector A 0TA 0TB E&M trunk connections 26 1 0RA 27 0RB 2 0E 28 0M 3 0ECG 29 0ESCG 4 1T 30 1R 5 1E 31 1M 6 MDF (W-BL) (BL-W) (W-O) (O-W) (W-G) (G-W) (W-BR) (BR-W) TipA TipB RingA RingB E M ECG ESCG Tip Ring E M (W-S) (S-W) (R-BL) (BL-R) 4-wire Type I E&M Trunk 2-wire Type I E&M Trunk Part of 2
PAGE 658
Page 658 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Configuration Each of the four trunk circuits on the E&M trunk card can be individually configured for trunk type, companding mode, and port-to-port loss compensation. Configuring the card requires both jumper changes and configuration software service entries. The locations of the jumpers are shown in Figure 154 on page 659. Jumper settings The NT8D15 E&M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements.
PAGE 659
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 659 of 906 Figure 154 E&M trunk card – jumper locations 553-6200 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 660
Page 660 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Table 208 E&M trunk card – jumper strap settings Mode of operation (Note 2) 2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk DX tip & ring pair Jumper (Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—rcv E—xmt E—rcv M—xmt J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3 J2.X On On (Note 3) On On Off Off J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J4.X Off Off Off Off Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 J5.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4) J6.X Off Off Off Off On On J7.
PAGE 661
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 661 of 906 Software service entries The trunk type is selected by making service change entries in Route Data Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance (LD 16). The companding mode is selected by making service change entries in Trunk Data Block (LD 14). Refer to Table 208 on page 660 to select the proper values for the trunk type being employed.
PAGE 662
Page 662 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows: • TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2 dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire non-VNL facility. • NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or when impedance compensation is not provided.
PAGE 663
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 663 of 906 Figure 155 Pad orientation System E&M Port B REC XMT Digital Analog XMT Analog REC 553-AAA1156 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 664
Page 664 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Applications The optional applications, features and signaling arrangements for each trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks. Refer to the Features and Services (553-3001-306) for information about assigning features and services to trunks. PAD switching The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by class-of-service (COS) assignments in the trunk data block (LD 14).
PAGE 665
NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Page 665 of 906 Table 210 shows the insertion loss from IPE port to IPE port. Table 210 Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB) IPE Ports 500/2500 Line Digital Line 2/4 Wire E&M Trunk 4 Wire (ESN) E&M Trunk 6 3.5 1 3 -0.5 1 5.5 3 0.5 0 2.5 -1 0.
PAGE 666
Page 666 of 906 NT8D15 E&M Trunk card Figure 156 Paging trunk operation System Cross connect Typical customerprovided external equipment NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card Bat Module I/O Panel Slot 0 Connector 0T 0A 0PG 26 1 27 2 K1 (w-bl) (bl-w) Bat MDF A 0R Unit 0 K1 Audio pair Tape recorder, radio, etc.
PAGE 667
680 Page 667 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 Connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 668
Page 668 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board • NT6D39 CPU/Network module • NT9D11 Core/Network module The SDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not support 20 mA current loop interface. Physical description The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 157 on page 669.
PAGE 669
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 669 of 906 Figure 157 NT8D41AA SDI paddle board Option switches LED Enable/disable switch Port 1 connector (RS-232C) Backplane mating connectors Option switches Port 2 connector (RS-232C) Option switches 553-5979 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 670
Page 670 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Functional description The NT8D41AA SDI paddle board has two asynchronous serial ports. These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system processor.
PAGE 671
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 671 of 906 a socket in the CPU area of the backplane allows it to work only when that CPU is active. The SDI paddle board is normally installed into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system processors. This is necessary because the active CPU switches automatically each night at midnight, and whenever a fault occurs on the active CPU card.
PAGE 672
Page 672 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Table 211 Connectors J1 and J2 pin assignments (Part 2 of 2) Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode 8 CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the SDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data.
PAGE 673
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 673 of 906 Option switch settings Address Address select switch SW4 and logic on the card always address the two UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 15 and 16. The settings for this switch are shown in Table 212.
PAGE 674
Page 674 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Table 213 SDI paddle board baud rate switch settings Port 1 – SW2 Port 2 – SW3 Baud rate 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 150 off off on on off off on on 300 off on off on off on off on 600 off off off on off off off on 1200 off on on off off on on off 2400 off off on off off off on off 4800 off on off off off on off off 9600 off off off off off off off off DTE/DCE/Fiber mode Each serial po
PAGE 675
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 675 of 906 Table 214 NT8D41AA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings Port 1 – SW5 Mode Port 1 – SW6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 DTE (terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on off off off off on on on on Port 2 – SW7 Port 2 – SW8 DTE (terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off DCE (modem) off off off o
PAGE 676
Page 676 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Figure 159 SDI paddle board option switch locations Port 1 Address selection Baud rate selection LED DS1 SW4 O1 23 4 N ^ Enable SW1 SW3 O1 23 4 N ^ SW2 Port 2 O1 23 4 N ^ Disable SW6 SW5 J1 Port 1 cable connector O1 23 4 5 6 N ^ Port 1 DTE/DCE mode selection J2 Backplane mating connectors O1 23 4 5 6 N ^ SW7 O1 23 4 5 6 N ^ SW8 Port 2 cable connector O1 23 4 5 6 N ^ Port 2 DTE/DCE mode selection 553-5988 553-3001-211
PAGE 677
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 677 of 906 Software service changes Once the NT8D41 SDI paddle board has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running the Configuration Record program are found in Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).
PAGE 678
Page 678 of 906 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Applications The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication devices, printers, and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of the card’s two serial ports. The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the switch to the system console.
PAGE 679
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 679 of 906 Figure 160 SDI paddle board cabling NT8D84 cable System monitor connector J1 Filter adapters (Note 3) Module front J1 To external equipment J2 N T 8 D 4 1 NT8D93 cable (Note 1) Backplane or NT8D46 cable to connector J2 in the pedestal, where it will connect to the system monitor (Note 2) Note 1: The NT8D93 cable is available in several lengths, refer to Equipment identification (553-3001-154) for specific information.
PAGE 680
Page 680 of 906 553-3001-211 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Standard 3.
PAGE 681
694 Page 681 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682 Connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 682
Page 682 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board • NT6D39 CPU/Network module • NT9D11 Core/Network module The QSDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not support the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA current loop interface. Physical description The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 161 on page 683.
PAGE 683
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 683 of 906 Figure 161 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board Port 1 DTE/DCE mode selection (See Table 7) LED J1 SW2 J2 SW3 O1 2 3 4 5 6 N ^ O1 2 3 4 5 6 N ^ Port 2 DTE/DCE mode selection (See Table 7) Port 2 RS-232 cable connector J3 O1 2 3 4 5 6 N ^ Port 3 DTE/DCE mode selection (See Table 7) Port 3 RS-232 cable connector J4 SW6 O1 2 3 4 5 6 N ^ O1 2 3 4 5 6 N ^ O123456 N ^ SW7 SW8 SW9 SW12 SW11 O1 2 3 4 N ^ SW16 SW15 Address selection for p
PAGE 684
Page 684 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Other logic on the card includes baud rate generators, RS-232-C driver/ receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to configure each UART. Figure 162 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board block diagram RS-232-C drivers and receivers UARTs TD UART RD no. 1 UART Port 1 TD RD Port 2 TD RD Port 3 TD RD Port 4 J1 no. 2 UART J2 no. 3 UART no.
PAGE 685
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 685 of 906 The QSDI paddle board is normally installed into a socket in the network area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the system processors. This is necessary because the active CPU switches automatically each night at midnight and whenever a fault occurs on the active CPU card. The QSDI paddle board can also be installed into a socket in the CPU area of the backplane (supported in NT6D39AA shelves only).
PAGE 686
Page 686 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Table 215 Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode 8 CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect to a terminal device (DTE).
PAGE 687
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 687 of 906 Configuring the QSDI paddle board Configuring the QSDI paddle board to work in a system consists of setting these option switches for each serial port: • Baud rate • Port address • DTE/DCE mode The QSDI paddle board has fourteen option switches, SW2–13, SW15-16. Figure 161 on page 683 identifies the location of option switches on the QSDI paddle board. Learn how to set these switches in the following sections.
PAGE 688
Page 688 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Table 216 NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings (Part 2 of 2) SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2), SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4) Baud rate Baud Clock (kHz) 1 2 3 4 4,800 76.80 on on off off 9,600 153.60 on off off off 19,200* 307.20 on on on on * For future use. Address Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card always address the four UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 14 and 15.
PAGE 689
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 689 of 906 SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identically. Figure 161 on page 683 displays SW15 and SW16.
PAGE 690
Page 690 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board DTE/DCE/Fiber mode Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card. Instructions for setting the switches SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8, and SW9 are shown in Table 218. Figure 161 on page 683 shows the location of these switches on the paddleboard.
PAGE 691
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 691 of 906 Software service changes Once the NT8D841BA QSDI paddle board has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it, using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running this program are found in Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).
PAGE 692
Page 692 of 906 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Applications The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication devices, printers, and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of the card’s two serial ports. The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the switch to the system console.
PAGE 693
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Page 693 of 906 Figure 163 NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling NT8D84 cable System monitor connector Filter adapters (NT8D84 cable) J1 Module front J1 J2 To external equipment J3 N T 8 D 4 1 B A J4 NT8D93 cable (Note 1) Backplane or NT8D46 cable to connector J4 in the pedestal, where it will connect to the system monitor (Note 2) Note 1: The NT8D93 cable is available in several lengths, refer to Equipment identification (553-3001-154) for specif
PAGE 694
Page 694 of 906 553-3001-211 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board Standard 3.
PAGE 695
700 Page 695 of 906 NTAG26 XMFR card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 MF signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 696
Page 696 of 906 NTAG26 XMFR card Table 219 lists the frequency values used for received signals.
PAGE 697
NTAG26 XMFR card Page 697 of 906 XMFR receiver specifications Table 220 provides the operating requirements for the NTAG26 circuit card. Table 220 XMFR receiver specifications (Part 1 of 3) Coding: Input sensitivity: Frequency sensitivity: Mu-Law must accept: 0 to -25 dBmO must reject: -35 to dBmO must accept: f +/- (1.
PAGE 698
Page 698 of 906 NTAG26 XMFR card Table 220 XMFR receiver specifications (Part 2 of 3) Noise Rejection: Error Rate in White Noise Immunity to Impulse Noise Error Rate from Power Lines Tolerate Intermodulation: 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 699
NTAG26 XMFR card Page 699 of 906 Table 220 XMFR receiver specifications (Part 3 of 3) KP: KP activation Multiple KP’s Excessive Components: The receiver must not respond to signals prior to KP. Remain unlocked until ST, STP, ST2P or ST3P is received. After the initial KP, subsequent KP’s are ignored while in unlocked mode. If more than two valid frequencies are detected, no digit is reported to the CPU.
PAGE 700
Page 700 of 906 NTAG26 XMFR card Physical specifications The physical specifications required by the NTAG26 XMFR circuit card are shown in Table 221. Table 221 Physical specifications Dimensions Faceplate LED Power requirements Environmental considerations 553-3001-211 Standard 3.00 Height:12.5 in. (320 mm) Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm) Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm) Lit when the circuit card is disabled 1.
PAGE 701
708 Page 701 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701 Introduction The NTAK02 Serial Data Interface/D-channel (SDI/DCH) digital trunk card is supported in the Media Gateway only for the ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) D-channel.
PAGE 702
Page 702 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Ports 1 and 3 are configured as DCH. Ports 0 and 2 are configured as SDI (not supported). See Table 222. Each pair is controlled by a switch, as shown in Table 223.
PAGE 703
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Page 703 of 906 Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE configuration. This option is selected from a jumper on the card. Table 224 shows the jumper settings.
PAGE 704
Page 704 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Connecting to the ports External devices are connected to the SDI/DCH card by the following: • the NTAK19FB four-port SDI cable. This cable does not have to be terminated at the cross connect terminal since it is equipped with connectors. • the NE-A25-B cable. Terminate the NE-A25-B cable at the cross connect terminal. Tables 225 through 228 give the pinouts for the SDI/DCH card.
PAGE 705
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Page 705 of 906 Table 226 NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal – Port 1 RS422 Cable Signal DTE DCE RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output Designations I=Input O=Output DTE DTE DCE Pair Color 5T 5R W-S S-W SCTEA — SCTA — O — I — O — I — SCT — SCT — 6T 6R R-BL BL-R SCTEB DTR SCTB DCD O O I I — — — — CH/CI DTR — DCD 7T 7R R-O O-R DSR DCD CH/CI DTR I I O O I I O O DSR DCD CH/CI DTR 8T 8R R-G G-R RTS CTS CTS RTS O I I O O I I O RTS C
PAGE 706
Page 706 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Table 227 NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal – Port 2 RS422 Cable Signal Designations I=Input O=Output DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE Signal Color 13T 13R BK-G G-BK — — — — — O — I — DTR — DCD 14T 14R BK-BR BR-BK — — — — I I O O DSR DCD CH/CI DTR 15T 15R BK-S S-BK — — — — O I I O RTS CTS CTS RTS 16T 16R Y-BL BL-Y — — — — I O O I RX TX TXD RXD 17T 17R Y-O O-Y O — I — O — I — — SG — SG Standard 3.
PAGE 707
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Page 707 of 906 Table 228 NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal – Port 3 RS422 Cable Signal RS232 Designations I=Input O=Output Designations I=Input O=Output Signal Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE 17T 17R Y-O O-Y SCTEA — SCTA — O — I — O — I — SCT — SCT — 18T 18R Y-G G-Y SCTEB DTR SCTB DCD O O I I — — — — CH/CI DTR — DCD 19T 19R Y-BR BR-Y DSR DCD CH/CI DTR I I O O I I O O DSR DCD CH/CI DTR 20T 20R Y-S S-Y RTS CTS CT
PAGE 708
Page 708 of 906 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card Characteristics of the low speed port Ports 0 and 2 are asynchronous, low speed ports. They transfer data to and from the line one bit at a time. The characteristics of the low speed port are as follows: • Baud rate: 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200 Default = 1200 • Parity: Odd, even, none Default = none • Stop bits: 1, 1.5, 2 Default = 1 • Flow control: XON/XOFF, CTS, non.
PAGE 709
720 Page 709 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 710
Page 710 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Physical description The DTI/PRI card uses a 9.5" by 12.5" multilayer printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. The clock controller and D-channel daughterboards are fastened by standoffs and connectors. See Figure 164 on page 710. Figure 164 NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card Stiffeners LEDs 1.
PAGE 711
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 711 of 906 The first five LEDs operate as follows: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash three times and then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 229. Table 229 NTAK09 LED states LED State Definition DIS On (Red) The NTAK09 circuit card is disabled. Off The NTAK09 is not in a disabled state. On (Green) The NTAK09 circuit card is in an active state.
PAGE 712
Page 712 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card NTAK09 DTI/PRI power on self-test When power is applied to the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card, the card performs a self-test. The LEDs directly associated with the NTAK09 circuit card are DIS, ACT, RED, YEL, and LBK. The clock controller LED is also included in the power on self-test. Table 230 provides the state of the NTAK09 LEDs during the self-test procedure.
PAGE 713
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 713 of 906 NTAK93 self-test The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard LED is the bottom LED on the faceplate of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard does not perform a self-test when power is applied to it. When power is applied, it turns red and remain steadily lit, indicating the DCH is disabled. When the DCH is enabled, the LED turns green and remains steadily lit. Self-tests of the NTAK93 daughterboard are invoked manually by commands in LD 96.
PAGE 714
Page 714 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card The NTAK09 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment. Functional description NTAK09 provides the following features and functions: 553-3001-211 • configurable parameters, including A-Law and µ-Law operation, digital pads on a per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe formats • AMI or B8ZS line coding • 1.
PAGE 715
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 715 of 906 Architecture Signaling interface The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of transmission are three bytes long. Interconnection The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04 1.5 Mb carrier cable. The NTBK04 is twenty feet long. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension, is also available.
PAGE 716
Page 716 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Digital pad The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad accommodates both µ255-law and A-Law coding. There are 32 combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-Law, A-Law to µ255, and A-Law to A-Law. These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan. See Table 231.
PAGE 717
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 717 of 906 D-channel interface The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps maximum, full-duplex, serial bit-stream configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output, transmit data input, receive clock output, and transmit clock output. The receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
PAGE 718
Page 718 of 906 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card extend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 232.
PAGE 719
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Page 719 of 906 Table 233 DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable (Part 2 of 2) From 50-pin MDF connector To DB-15 Signal name Description pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network Clock controller interface The clock controller interface provides the recovered clock from the external digital facility to the clock controller daughterboard through the backplane.
PAGE 720
Page 720 of 906 553-3001-211 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card Standard 3.
PAGE 721
734 Page 721 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723 Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 722
Page 722 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Physical description The 2 Mb DTI pack uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5", multi-layer printed circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8” wide and contains six LEDs. The LEDs operate as follows: • After the card is plugged in, the LEDs (a-e) are turned on by the power-up circuit. The clock controller LED is independently controlled by its own microprocessor. • After initialization, the LEDs (a-e) flash three times (0.5 seconds on, 0.
PAGE 723
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 723 of 906 Table 234 NTAK10 LED states (Part 2 of 2) LED State Definition Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary reference. Off The clock controller is switched off. Note: See “Clock controller interface” on page 729 in this chapter for more on tracking and free-run operation. Power requirements The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplane. It draws less than 2 A on +5 V, 50 mA on +15 V and 50 mA on –15 V.
PAGE 724
Page 724 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card • per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilities for near-end and far-end • self-test • download of incoming ABCD validation times from software • warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS16 transmitted) Applicability to France Features specific to DTI requirements for France are implemented in firmware, and are switch-accessed.
PAGE 725
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 725 of 906 Transmit data To transmit data on the carrier, the incoming serial bit stream from the NTAK02 circuit card is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes. The signaling bits are extracted by the signaling interface circuitry. Digital Pad: The parallel data is presented to the pad PROM. The PROM contains pad values, idle code, and A/µ-law conversion. They can be set independently for incoming and outgoing voice on a per channel basis.
PAGE 726
Page 726 of 906 NTAK10 2.
PAGE 727
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 727 of 906 If a coaxial interface is required, use NT5K85 in conjunction with the NTBK05. Table 235 2 MB DTI switch options Switch Off (Switch Open) On (Switch Closed) S1-1 — — S1-2 CC Enabled CC Disabled S2-1 120 ohms 75 ohms S2-2 75 ohms 120 ohms S3-1 non-French Firmware French Firmware S3-2 — — Channel associated signaling Channel associated signaling means that each traffic carrying channel has its own signaling channel permanently associated with it.
PAGE 728
Page 728 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card With the exception of the outpulsing signals and special signals, such as Denmark's Flash signal and Sweden's Parking signal, the minimum duration of any signal state is 100 ms. Some signal states can have a minimum duration time that is longer than 100 ms. Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) Periodic Pulse Monitoring (PPM) is used to collect toll charges on outgoing CO trunk calls.
PAGE 729
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 729 of 906 converted from digital to AMI and sent to the carrier. A transformer provides isolation and impedance matching (75 ohms or 120 ohms). Rx Direction The AMI data of the carrier is converted to digital and fed to the input selector as well as the output selector for far end loopback. Clock recovery circuitry within the receiving device extracts the 2.0 MHz clock. This clock generates the frame and multiframe count and sends them to the clock controller as a reference.
PAGE 730
Page 730 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Tracking mode There are two stages to clock controller tracking: • tracking a reference, and • locked onto a reference. When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked onto the reference.
PAGE 731
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 731 of 906 Clock controller functions and features The NTAK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and features include: • phase-locking to a reference, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and distributing it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two references at a time can be accepted.
PAGE 732
Page 732 of 906 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card secondary, but switches over to the primary whenever the primary recovers. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the primary. If the software command “track to secondary” is given, the clock controller tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references.
PAGE 733
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Page 733 of 906 Reference clock interface The recovered clock derived from the facility is available on the MDF connector. The signals at these connectors conform to the electrical characteristics of the EIA RS-422 standard. Switch settings Various 2MB DTI switch options exist on the NTAK10. These are shown in Table 236.
PAGE 734
Page 734 of 906 553-3001-211 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card Standard 3.
PAGE 735
744 Page 735 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 736
Page 736 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Note: The card is restricted to slots 1 through 3 in EMC- type cabinets (such as NAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx cabinets). It will not work in slots 4 through 10 in these cabinets. The NTAK20 clock controller card can support 1.5 Mb, 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb clock recovery rates. IMPORTANT! Each MG 1000S that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock.
PAGE 737
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Page 737 of 906 • jitter filtering • use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and qualify clocking information Clocking modes The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run). Tracking mode In tracking mode, one or more DTI/PRI cards supply a clock reference to the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard.
PAGE 738
Page 738 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Free-run (non-tracking) In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any outside source. Instead, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when the system acts as a master clock source for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the system is intended to be a slave to an external network clock.
PAGE 739
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Page 739 of 906 Functional description The main functional blocks of the NTAK20 architecture include: • phase difference detector circuit • digital Phase Locked Loop (PLL) • clock detection circuit • digital-to-analog converter • CPU MUX bus interface • signal conditioning drivers and buffers • sanity timer • microprocessor • CPU interface • external timing interface Phase difference detector circuit This circuit, under firmware control, enables a
PAGE 740
Page 740 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard System clock specification and characteristics Since the accuracy requirements for CCITT and EIA Stratum 3 are different, it is necessary to have two TCVCXOs which feature different values of frequency tuning sensitivity. See Table 238. Table 238 System clock specification and characteristics Specifications CCITT EIA Base Frequency 20.48 MHz 20.
PAGE 741
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Page 741 of 906 without software intervention. If both references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover. Autorecovery and chatter If the command “track to primary” is given, the clock controller tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and secondary references.
PAGE 742
Page 742 of 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Holdover and free-run In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover. Free-run mode is initiated when the clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming reference clock.
PAGE 743
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Page 743 of 906 backplane line. It designates the DTI/PRI motherboard as a primary reference source. The secondary reference is obtained from another DTI/PRI card, which is designated by a technician. No other clock sources are used. External timing interface The clock controller provides an external timing interface and accepts two signals as timing references.
PAGE 744
Page 744 of 906 553-3001-211 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard Standard 3.
PAGE 745
762 Page 745 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 746
Page 746 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card IMPORTANT! Each MG 1000S that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs) if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. Physical description The NTAK79 uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8” wide.
PAGE 747
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 747 of 906 Table 239 NTAK79 LEDs (Part 2 of 3) LED State Definition RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm state of: Loss of Carrier (LOS) Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS). Off No red (local) alarm. On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote alarm indication from the far end. The alarm can be either Alarm Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI).
PAGE 748
Page 748 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Table 239 NTAK79 LEDs (Part 3 of 3) LED State Definition DCH On (Red) DCH is switched on and disabled. On (Green) DCH is switched on and enabled, but not necessarily established. Off DCH is switched off. NTAK79 switches The NTAK79 card incorporates four on-board dip switches. The tables that follow provide information on the various settings and related functions of these switches.
PAGE 749
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 749 of 906 Figure 165 NTAK79 card with switch locations NTAK79 Faceplate Switch 3 1 2 LEDs Jack Switch 1 1 2 Switch 2 1 2 Switch 4 1 2 553-7869.
PAGE 750
Page 750 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Switch SW1 – DCHI Configuration This switch enables/disables the on-board DCHI and sets the operating mode of the DCHI. DPNSS1 mode is not supported at this time. For all other countries that do not use DPNSS, use Q.931 mode. Table 240 Switch SW1 Switch Down (On) Up (Off) SW 1-1 enable DCHI disable DCHI SW 1-2 DPNSS1/DASS2 Q.931 Switch SW2 – Carrier Impedance Configuration This switch sets the carrier impedance to either 120 ohms or 75 ohms.
PAGE 751
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 751 of 906 Switch SW4 – Carrier Shield Grounding This switch enables for the selective grounding of the Tx / Rx pairs of the carrier cable. Closing the switch (down position) applies Frame Ground (FGND) to the coaxial carrier cable shield, creating a 75 ohms unbalanced configuration. This applies only to the NTBK05CA cable.
PAGE 752
Page 752 of 906 NTAK79 2.
PAGE 753
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 753 of 906 The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. The DS-30X timeslot number is mapped to the PCM-30 channel number. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused for PCM. Digital PAD Software selects A-Law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel.
PAGE 754
Page 754 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Table 244 Digital pad values and offset allocations (Part 2 of 2) PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 10 10.0 dB 10 –10.0 dB 11 11.0 dB 11 spare 12 12.0 dB 12 spare 13 13.0 dB 13 spare 14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code 15 spare 15 Unassigned Code Signaling interface The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link through the DS-30X timeslot zero data bit zero.
PAGE 755
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 755 of 906 Impedance matching The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by a switch, as shown in Table 245. Table 245 Impedance matching switch selection Cable On Off 75 ohms S2 S1 120 ohms S1 S2 Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.
PAGE 756
Page 756 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card requirements of the CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency range from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz. Transmitter functions The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM transceiver and produces bipolar pulses which conform to the CCITT recommendation G.703 pulse shape.
PAGE 757
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card • receive clock output • transmit clock output Page 757 of 906 The receive and transmit clocks have slightly different bit rates from each other, as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. The NTAK79 has an onboard D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI). It is the equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH pack. This enables for a completely operational ISDN PRA link with clock synchronization and D-channel on a single circuit card.
PAGE 758
Page 758 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Card-LAN interface A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN serial link and the echo canceller/test port interface. The echo/test interface is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8-bit connected to port A of the UART. The Card-LAN interface is an asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected to port B of the UART. The connection to the echo canceler/test port is available at the backplane/ MDF connector.
PAGE 759
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 759 of 906 If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller will track it, lock onto it, and match frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however, environmental circumstances will cause the external or internal clocks to drift. When this happens, the internal clock controller will briefly enter the tracking stage. The green LED will flash momentarily until the clock controller is locked onto the reference once again.
PAGE 760
Page 760 of 906 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card • jitter filtering • use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and to qualify clocking information Reference switchover Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference failure. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference will be said to be out of specification.
PAGE 761
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 761 of 906 A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary and secondary reference sources. Holdover and free-run In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the clock controller provides a stable holdover. The free-run mode is initiated when the clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming reference clock.
PAGE 762
Page 762 of 906 553-3001-211 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card Standard 3.
PAGE 763
768 Page 763 of 906 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 764
Page 764 of 906 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard — system parameters are service changeable (system parameters are downloaded from software) — incoming Layer 3 message validation procedures are implemented in the D-PORT firmware — supported message units and information elements can be service changed — translation of the CCITT message types information elements into a proprietary coding scheme for faster CPU operation — convention of IA5-encoded digits to BCD-encoded digits for incoming l
PAGE 765
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard Page 765 of 906 Faceplate LEDs NTAK09 1.5 Mb PRI and NTBK50 2.0 MB PRI cards LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The DCHI LED is dual-color (red and green). The LEDs are described in Table 248. Table 248 Faceplate LEDs State Definition On (Red) NTAK93 is equipped and disabled. On (Green) NTAK93 is equipped and enabled, but not necessarily established. Off NTAK93 is not equipped.
PAGE 766
Page 766 of 906 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard DMA controller A Z80A-DMA chip controls the data transfer between local RAM memory and communication ports. The DMA channels are only used in the receive direction (from line to SSC), not in the transmit direction. Random Access Memory (RAM) A total of 32 KBytes of RAM space for each pair of ports is used as the communication buffer and for firmware data storage.
PAGE 767
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard Page 767 of 906 The port will operate at: Data Rate Duplex Clock Interface 56kbps, 64kbps Full Internal / External RS422 The address of ports is selected by hardwired backplane card address. Port characteristics and LAPD parameters are downloaded from software. D-Port — SDTI/PRI interface Below is a brief description of signals.
PAGE 768
Page 768 of 906 553-3001-211 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard Standard 3.
PAGE 769
772 Page 769 of 906 NTBK22 MISP card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 770
Page 770 of 906 NTBK22 MISP card Refer to ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration (553-3001-218) and ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Features (553-3001-380) for additional information. Functional description Each MISP can support 4 line cards (UILC or SILC or any combination of the two). Each line card supports 8 DSLs, therefore each MISP supports 32 DSLs. Since each DSL uses two B-channels and one D-channel the MISP supports 64 B-channels and 32 D-channels.
PAGE 771
NTBK22 MISP card Page 771 of 906 High-Level Data Link Controller (HDLC) The HDLC is a format converter that supports up to 32 serial channels that communicate at speeds up to 64 kbps.
PAGE 772
Page 772 of 906 553-3001-211 NTBK22 MISP card Standard 3.
PAGE 773
784 Page 773 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777 Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 774
Page 774 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the MG 1000S. The card is not supported in the MG 1000S Expansion. IMPORTANT! Each MG 1000S that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. Note: Clocking slips can occur between MG 1000S systems that are clocked from different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade voice quality. Physical description The NTBK50 uses a standard 9.
PAGE 775
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 775 of 906 Figure 166 NTBK50 2.
PAGE 776
Page 776 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card The LEDs are described in Table 249. Table 249 NTBK50 faceplate LEDs (Part 1 of 2) LED State Definition OOS On (Red) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is disabled or out-of-service. Also, the state of the card after power-up, completion of self test, and exiting remote loopback. Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is not in a disabled state. On (Green) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is in an active state. Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is in a disabled state.
PAGE 777
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 777 of 906 Table 249 NTBK50 faceplate LEDs (Part 2 of 2) LED DCH State Definition Flashing (Green) NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in LD 60. If the CC is tracking this can be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock controller error conditions.
PAGE 778
Page 778 of 906 NTBK50 2.
PAGE 779
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 779 of 906 message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps). The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused for PCM. Digital PAD The software selects A-Law or µ-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for each channel.
PAGE 780
Page 780 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Table 250 Digital Pad - values and offset allocations (Part 2 of 2) PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1 Offset PAD Offset PAD 9 9.0 dB 9 -9.0 dB 10 10.0 dB 10 -10.0 dB 11 11.0 dB 11 spare 12 12.0 dB 12 spare 13 13.0 dB 13 spare 14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code 15 spare 15 Unassigned Code Signaling interface The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller.
PAGE 781
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 781 of 906 Impedance matching (Switch SW2) The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120 ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by SW2, as shown in Table 251. Table 251 Impedance matching switch settings Cable Type SW 2-1 75 ohms Down (On) 120 ohms Up (Off) Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the card.
PAGE 782
Page 782 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Carrier Shield grounding (Switch SW4) Table 253 lists the Carrier Shield ground switch settings. Table 253 Carrier Shield grounding switch settings Switch Down (On) Up (Off) SW 4 – 1 Rx – FGND Rx – OPEN SW 4 – 2 Tx – FGND Tx – OPEN Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive coax signal.
PAGE 783
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card Page 783 of 906 CEPT transceiver The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization, channel, and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.703 and G.732. The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1 KHz framing pulse.
PAGE 784
Page 784 of 906 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card mode, which is not supported at this time. The DDCH supports only a single port which directly interfaces to the PRI motherboard. See Table 254. Table 254 Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1) Switch Function On Off S1-1 — — — S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS DCHI Card-LAN interface A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN serial link test port interface.
PAGE 785
790 Page 785 of 906 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787 Download operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 786
Page 786 of 906 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard — DCH interface — layer 3 preprocessor — traffic reporting including link capacity Physical description The NTBK51 daughterboard interfaces with the system CPU and is mounted on either the NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2 Mb PRI digital trunk card. You can install this card in: • slots 1 through 9 in the main cabinet or slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, or 41-49 in the expansion cabinets • slots 1 through 4 in the MG 1000S.
PAGE 787
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard Page 787 of 906 Functional description The main functional blocks of the NTBK51 architecture include the following: • Microprocessors • Main memory • Shared memory • EPROM memory • Flash EPROM memory • EEPROM memory • Serial communication controller • Sanity timer • Bus timer Microprocessors One microprocessor handles data transfer between each serial interface and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from the so
PAGE 788
Page 788 of 906 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard Main memory The main 68EC020 system memory is comprised of 1 Mbyte of SRAM and is accessible in 8 or 16 bits. The software, base code and application reside in main RAM and is downloaded from the software through the shared memory. Shared memory The shared memory is the interface between the CPU and the 68EC020 MPU. This memory is a 16 Kbyte RAM, expandable to 64 kbytes and accessible in 8 or 16 bits.
PAGE 789
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard Page 789 of 906 Sanity timer A sanity timer is incorporated on the DDCH to prevent the MPU from getting tied-up as the result of a hardware or software fault. If the MPU encounters a hardware or software fault and enters a continuous loop, the sanity timer enables the DDCH to reset itself. Bus timer The bus timer presents an error signal to the MPU if an attempt to access a device did not receive acknowledgment within the bus time-out period of 120 ms.
PAGE 790
Page 790 of 906 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard download depends on the result of the check made by the CPU on the MSDL base code and application software. If a forced download enable command is executed in LD 96, the MSDL base code and application are forced down to the DDCH card, even if the base and application software is already resident on the DDCH card.
PAGE 791
810 Page 791 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 792
Page 792 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards The cards are identified by a two-letter suffix to the product code called the vintage. The card vintage is based on whether PPM is equipped or not, and the individual countries where the card is being installed. The cards listed below are minimum vintage required to support the following countries: • NTCK16AA generic Central Office trunk card with PPM — Ireland • NTCK16BC generic Central Office trunk card without PPM.
PAGE 793
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 793 of 906 Physical description The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards have eight units. Each unit connects to the shelf backplane through an 80-pin connector. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel which is then cabled to the cross-connect terminal. At the cross-connect terminal, each unit connects to external apparatus by Tip and Ring leads.
PAGE 794
Page 794 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards • provide 4 dB dynamic attenuation pads on a per call basis • allow individual units or the entire board to be disabled by software • provide software selectable A-law or µ-law companding • indicate self-test status during an automatic or manual self-test • provide card-identification for auto configuration, and for determining the serial number and firmware level of the card • convert transmission signals from analog-to-digital and from
PAGE 795
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 795 of 906 Call placed by Central Office The Central Office initiates a call by applying ringing between the tip and ring wires. If the call is answered, the ringing detector on the trunk card is switched out and a low resistance dc loop is placed between the tip and ring leads. On trunks configured for battery supervision, the battery detector records the polarity of the tip and ring wires and sends an answer acknowledge signal to software.
PAGE 796
Page 796 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Electrical specifications Power requirements Table 256 shows the power requirements for the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards. Table 256 NTCK16 circuit card power requirements Voltage Idle Current Active current +15.0 V dc (See 1) 170 ma 330 ma -15.0 V dc (See 1) 170 ma 249 ma +8.5 V dc (See 2) 101 ma 100 ma +5.0 V dc 160 ma 322 ma Note 1: Analog circuitry is powered with +/-12 V generated from +/-15 V.
PAGE 797
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 797 of 906 Table 257 NTCK16 circuit card environmental specifications (Part 2 of 2) Parameter Specifications Storage temperature –20 to +60 degrees C Storage humidity 5 to 95% Relative Humidity Pad switching The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support the North American loss plan. Software configuration allows the selection of 4 dB loss pads on a per unit basis.
PAGE 798
Page 798 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Figure 167 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors A, E, K, R P in s Lead designations P a ir C o lo r A COT T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 799
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 799 of 906 Figure 168 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors B, F, L, S P in s Lead designations P a ir C o lo r B COT T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7 T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 I / O P a n e l C o n n e c to r F L U n it N u m b e r S 26 1 W-BL BL-W 27 2 W-O O-W 28 3 W-G G-W 29 4 W-BR BR-W 30 5 W-S S-W S L S L S L S L 31 6 R-BL BL-R O T O T O T O T 2 32 7 R-O O-R 1 5
PAGE 800
Page 800 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Figure 169 NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors C, G, M, T P in s Lead designations P a ir C o lo r I / O C P a n e l C o n n e c to r G M U n it N u m b e r T COT T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7 T0 R0 T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 801
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 801 of 906 NTCK16AX Central Office trunk card Route Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown. LD 16 – Route Data Block for NTCK16AX. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit TYPE: COT Define a new Route Data Block CUST xx Customer number as defined in LD 15.
PAGE 802
Page 802 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Trunk Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown: LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16AX. (Part 1 of 2) Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new trunk unit TYPE: COT Central Office Trunk TN Terminal Number lscu Format for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E, where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit XTRK (See note on page 803.
PAGE 803
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 803 of 906 LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16AX. (Part 2 of 2) Prompt Response Description CLS (LOL) SHL Attenuation Pads In, (Out) DTN, (DIP) Digitone signaling, (digipulse) P20, P12, (P10) Make-break ratio for pulse dialing speed. Note: These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each NTCK16AX card.
PAGE 804
Page 804 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards NTCK16BX Central Office trunk card Route Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown: LD 16 – Route Data Block for NTCK16BX. Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new unit. TYPE: COT Define a new Route Data Block. CUST xx Customer number as defined in LD 15.
PAGE 805
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 805 of 906 Trunk Data Block Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown: LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX. (Part 1 of 2) Prompt Response Description REQ: NEW Define a new trunk unit. TYPE: COT Central Office Trunk TN Terminal Number lscu Format for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E, where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit XTRK (See note 1 on page 806.) XCOT Type is IPE COT CDEN (8D) Card density is 8D (default).
PAGE 806
Page 806 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards LD 14 – Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX. (Part 2 of 2) Prompt Response Description (DIP) DTN Digitone signaling, (digipulse) (P10) P12 P20 Make-break ratio for pulse dialing speed. Note 1: These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each NTCK16BX card. 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 807
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 807 of 906 BTID values by country Country BTIDCadence Brazil Tortola10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexico 10 250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off Mexico 8 375 ms on/off Singapore11 750 ms on/off Ireland 3 500 +/- 50 ms on/off Ireland 9 375 - 750 ms on/off Kuwait, Chile 6500 +/- 50 ms on/off Venezuela, Indonesia12300 ms on, 200 ms off Thailand, Korea12300 ms on, 200 ms off Argentina12 300 ms on, 200 ms off Argentina07 250 - 500 ms on/off Turkey 14 10 seconds of Tone 1: 200 ms o
PAGE 808
Page 808 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Detection limits Pulses detected by the NTCK16AX circuit card must be within the following limits: Frequency 11 880 to 12 120 Hz Level 105 to 1100 mVrms Note: The pack should not be used to detect levels of 1100 mVrms or greater a Tip and Ring, as this may result in noise. Pulse length Dependent on PPID – see LD 14 Busy tone detect Busy tone is sent by the Central Office to indicate the release of an established call.
PAGE 809
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Page 809 of 906 Therefore the following steps must be followed when the Generic XFCOT is installed: 1 Define Loss Switching mode. Respond to the prompts in LD 97 as shown. LD 97 – Defining Loss Switching mode. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG TYPE: SYSP IPE system parameters configuration YES Select North American transmission plan. ...
PAGE 810
Page 810 of 906 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards Equivalencies The following equivalencies do apply: • XFCOT COT SHL is equivalent with XUT COT TRC • XFCOT COT LOL is equivalent with XUT COT NTC. The entries TRC and NTC will no longer be allowed for the Generic XFCOT.
PAGE 811
824 Page 811 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 100BaseT IP daughterboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 PC card interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 812
Page 812 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card The NTDK20GA SSC card has the following components and features: • NTTK25 daughterboard Flash memory, NTAK19 SIMM module (16 MB) DRAM, and Backup memory Note: The NTTK13 daughterboard is still supported.
PAGE 813
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 813 of 906 Figure 170 NTDK20 SSC card and expansion daughterboard in the Call Server Flash ROM Drive Security Device PCMCIA Drive 100BaseT daughterboard Ports 1 & 3 for MG 1000S systems 1 and 3 Connector for 2nd 100BaseT daughterboard.
PAGE 814
Page 814 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card Memory The majority of system and customer configured data is both controlled and stored on the NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash ROM. An active and backup copy of customer data is also kept on the Flash ROM. In the event of data loss, the NTDK20 SSC card also retains a copy of customer files in an area called the Backup flash drive. The NTDK20 SSC card is equipped with 8MB of temporary memory space called DRAM. DRAM functions much like RAM on a computer system.
PAGE 815
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 815 of 906 100BaseT IP daughterboards A 100BaseT IP Daughterboard mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card enables the connection of the Call Server to a MG 1000S. See Figure 170 on page 813. Each daughterboard increases the number of conference channels by 32. The maximum number of conference ports is 96. Table 259 on page 817 provides the ports, cables, and connection data on the IP daughterboards.
PAGE 816
Page 816 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card Figure 171 NTDK83AA dual-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard Figure 172 NTDK99A single-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 817
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 817 of 906 Table 259 Expansion daughterboards Number of ports Daughterboard NTDK99 (used in MG 1000S) one NTDK83 (used in Call Server two Cable type Max. distance between Call Server and MG 1000S systems Use the supplied NTTK34AA UTP CAT 5 RJ-45 2 m cross-over cable to connect the Call Server and MG 1000S using the 100BaseT daughterboards. MG 1000S systems can be located up to 100 m (328 ft.
PAGE 818
Page 818 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card Figure 173 Call Server connection to Media Gateway 1000S systems Call Server connection to Media Gateway 1000S Call Server Media Gateway 1000S Software Daughterboard Software Daughterboard Single Port 100BaseT Daughterboard Dual Port 100BaseT Daughterboard Dual Port 100BaseT Daughterboard LAN • The Call Server connects to the LAN via dual port daughterboards. • One 100BaseT connection is required for each Media Gateway 1000.
PAGE 819
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 819 of 906 Security device The NTDK20 SSC card in each MG 1000S must contain a NTDK57DA Security device, a remote dongle (NT_Rem) which is keyed to match the NTDK57AA Security device on the Call Server and a standard dongle (NT_STD). This maintains the requirement of a single keycode for each system. Refer to Figure 170 on page 813 for the location of the device.
PAGE 820
Page 820 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card SDI ports The NTDK20 SSC card in both the Call Server and the MG 1000S systems contains three SDI ports used to connect on-site terminals or remote terminals through a modem. Table 260 shows the port default settings.
PAGE 821
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 821 of 906 The MG 1000S 10BaseT port can run in Normal mode or Survival mode. In Normal mode, the MG 1000S does not provide access to maintenance or alarm management. External connections to the 10BaseT port are provided by a 15-pin connector located on the backplanes of the Call Server and MG 1000S systems. MG 1000S/Expansion card slot assignment The MG 1000S and MG 1000S Expansion contain physical card slots, numbered 1 to 10.
PAGE 822
Page 822 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card Table 261 MG 1000S and MG 1000S Expansion slot assignments MG 1000S/MG 1000S Expansion First Second Third Fourth Physical card slot Logical card slot Physical card slot Logical card slot Physical card slot Logical card slot Physical card slot Logical card slot 1 11 1 21 1 31 1 41 2 12 2 22 2 32 2 42 3 13 3 23 3 33 3 43 4 14 4 24 4 34 4 44 5 * 5 * 5 * 5 * 6 * 6 * 6 * 6 * 7 17 7 27 7 37 7 4
PAGE 823
NTDK20 Small System Controller card Page 823 of 906 Figure 174 MG 1000S slots Media Gateway 1000 553-AAA1991 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 824
Page 824 of 906 NTDK20 Small System Controller card Figure 175 MG 1000S Expansion slots Media Gateway 1000 and Media Gateway 1000 Chassis Expansion 553-AAA1992 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 825
838 Page 825 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 Software description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 826
Page 826 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card To provide CEMUX communication with the card, changes are also required to create an I/O entry for the card. You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the MG 1000S. The card is not supported in the MG 1000S Expansion. Up to four digital trunks are supported in each MG 1000S. Note 1: For CISPR B group cabinets, the active Clock Controller (NTAK20) can only occupy slots 1-3.
PAGE 827
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 827 of 906 Figure 176 NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller DCH F/W LEN 0 LEN 1 Len 2 Connector Socket 1 2 3 4 Stiffeners ON SW LEDs Bantam Jacks Connector Pins TMD I OO S AC T RE D YE L LBK NTAK93/51 Clock Controller CC DC H Mounting Holes RC V XM T NTR B21 Standoffs 553-CSE9024 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 828
Page 828 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows: • During system power up, the LEDs are on. • When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times, then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 262. Table 262 NTRB21 LED states LED State Definition DIS On (Red) The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled. Off The NTRB21 is not in a disabled state. On (Green) The NTRB21 circuit card is in an active state.
PAGE 829
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 829 of 906 Figure 177 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate TMDI OOS ACT RED YEL LBK CC DCH MAINT Monitor Port RS232 Rx Tx 553-CSE0007 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 830
Page 830 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Foreign and surge voltage protection Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility and the system. For public T1 facilities, this protection is provided by the local operating company. In a private T1 facility environment (a campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly can be used. The NTRB21 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.
PAGE 831
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 831 of 906 Software description Changes from the NTAK09 are required for the new trunk card and License parameters are n service change and maintenance overlays. There is a change to CardLAN to introduce a new CardLAN ID. The download of PSDL data is also changed to handle a 32 bit download as well as existing 16 bit. Hardware description NTRB21 TMDI card The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBits Digital Trunk Interface or Primary Rate Interface functionality.
PAGE 832
Page 832 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Figure 178 NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate TMDI OOS ACT RED YEL LBK CC DCH MAINT .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... RS232 Monitor Port Rx Tx 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 833
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 833 of 906 Microprocessor The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the following major tasks: • Task handler: also referred to as an executive. The task handler provides orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering constraints.
PAGE 834
Page 834 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Table 263 Digital pad values and offset allocations Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1 0 0dB –7db 1 2dB –8db 2 3dB –9db 3 4dB –10db 4 5dB 0.6db 5 6.
PAGE 835
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card • receive clock output • transmit clock output Page 835 of 906 The bit rate of the receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each other. This is determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks. Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes: • 56 kbps • 64 kbps clear • 64 kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted) DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot.
PAGE 836
Page 836 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Cross-connect – Level 1 (DSX-1), or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 264.
PAGE 837
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card Page 837 of 906 Connector pinout The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15 position Male D-type connector.
PAGE 838
Page 838 of 906 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card IMPORTANT! Each MG 1000S that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked to an external reference clock. If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main Option 11C cabinet. A cabinet that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller.
PAGE 839
844 Page 839 of 906 NTVQ01xx Media Card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 Hardware architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843 Survivability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 840
Page 840 of 906 NTVQ01xx Media Card Figure 179 NTVQ01xx Media Card The NTVQ01xx Media Card provides faceplate and backplane interfaces, which are used to connect external LANs. This section provides information on the faceplate connectors and indicators. 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 841
NTVQ01xx Media Card Page 841 of 906 Hardware architecture The Media Card comes in two versions: 8-port and 32-port. Faceplate connectors and indicators Figure 180 on page 842 shows the NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate. Reset switch The reset switch on the faceplate manually resets the Media Card.
PAGE 842
Page 842 of 906 NTVQ01xx Media Card Figure 180 NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate Reset Button Reset MC Enable LED PCMCIA Slot A: E T 100 10 Ethernet Activity LEDs A HEX Display NTVQ01AA Maintenance Port J2 Lock Latches 553-MIRAN0001 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 843
NTVQ01xx Media Card Page 843 of 906 RS-232 Asynchronous Maintenance Port An 8-pin mini-DIN socket on the NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate provides access to the RS-232 port. This faceplate port can provide access to the Media Card for OA&M purposes. The maintenance port is also available through a female DB9 connector on the 50-pin I/O Adaptor. This should be used to make a permanent terminal connection.
PAGE 844
Page 844 of 906 553-3001-211 NTVQ01xx Media Card Standard 3.
PAGE 845
850 Page 845 of 906 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 Physical description The NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium (ITG-P) card supports IP Phones by providing a communication gateway for the IP Phone between the IP data network and the system.
PAGE 846
Page 846 of 906 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Functional description Figure 181 on page 847 shows the ITG-P card faceplate components. The information in this section describes the components. Faceplate components NWK The faceplate connector labeled NWK is a 9-pin, sub-miniature D-type connector. The connector is not used for the ITG-P application. WARNING The NWK connector looks like a 9-pin serial connector. Do not connect a serial cable or any other cable to it.
PAGE 847
NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Page 847 of 906 Figure 181 NTVQ55AA ITG-P card faceplate NWK Ethernet Voice Port ITG-P LED (card status) Reset Switch ITG-P Reset NWK Status NWK LEDs (Ethernet) Type III PCMCIA slot (ATA Drive A:) A: Four-character LED-based Matrix Maintenance Display NTVQ55AA RS-232 Maintenance Port Maint Port Inboard: - Type III PCMCIA slot (ATA Drive B:) - Onboard Flash Drive C: 553-CSE9150 Note: There are no Ethernet status LEDs for the ELAN management interface.
PAGE 848
Page 848 of 906 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card NWK Status LED NWK Status LEDs display the TLAN interface card Ethernet activity: • Green – on if the carrier (link pulse) is received from the TLAN interface card Ethernet hub. • Yellow – flashes when there is TLAN interface card data activity. During heavy traffic, yellow can stay continuously lit. Note: There are no Ethernet status LEDs for the ELAN management interface. PC card slots The ITG-P card has one faceplate PC card slot, designated drive A.
PAGE 849
NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Page 849 of 906 • alternate connection to the serial maintenance port DS-30X • Card LAN interfaces DS-30X voice/signaling DS-30X carries Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) voice and proprietary signaling on the backplane between the ITG-P card and the SSC. Card LAN Card LAN carries card polling and initialization messages on the backplane between the ITG-P card and the SSC. Assembly description The ITG-P card assembly consists of a two-slot motherboard/daughterboard combination.
PAGE 850
Page 850 of 906 553-3001-211 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card Standard 3.
PAGE 851
868 Page 851 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854 Connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 852
Page 852 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Each system can accommodate up to eight ESDI cards, for a total of 16 synchronous ports per system.
PAGE 853
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 853 of 906 Figure 182 CPC513 ESDI card front panel Q P C 5 1 3 Card lock latch CSL/ ESDI ENB LED Enable/disable switch DIS ESDI port 1 connector J1 ESDI port 2 connector Card lock latch J2 553-5981 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 854
Page 854 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Functional description The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelligent, two-port synchronous serial data interface card. See Figure 183. The two serial input/output data ports terminate on DB-25 connectors on the front panel of the card. Each port operates independently in synchronous mode, in half or full duplex, at speeds of up to 64 kbps. Each port can be connected to either Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) or Data Communications Equipment (DCE).
PAGE 855
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 855 of 906 The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelligent controller. The local micro-processor performs all of the overhead associated with synchronous data transfer. The system processor passes data to the ESDI card processor a byte at a time using conventional memory reads and writes. The ESDI card processor stores the data in a RAM cache on the ESDI card, and passes it to the synchronous communication chip in blocks using Direct Memory Access (DMA) techniques.
PAGE 856
Page 856 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Table 266 Characteristics of synchronous ports (Part 2 of 2) Characteristics Description Data Link Level LAPB protocol remote host address (3), 1 Modify link control system parameters* yes, (no) Modify link performance thresholds (Note 1) yes, (no) Note 1: * See the Configuration Record (LD 17) in Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311) to modify the link control system parameters and performance thresholds.
PAGE 857
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 857 of 906 Fault detection Firmware on the ESDI card detects hardware faults on the card and link level LAPB protocol faults. It reports the faults to the CPU when predetermined thresholds (downloaded at initialization) have been exceeded.
PAGE 858
Page 858 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Electrical interface options Interface options are selected by inserting jumper plugs into the appropriate sockets on the card: • RS-232-C interface: The EIA RS-232-C interface can be used for speeds up to 19.2 kbps and distances of less than 15.24 m (50 ft). The ESDI card supports a subset of the RS-232-C signals. See Table 268 on page 859.
PAGE 859
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 859 of 906 Connector pin assignments Table 268 shows the pin assignments for J1 and J2 when the port is configured for RS-232-C interface, and Table 269 on page 860 shows the pin assignments for J1 and J2 when the port is configured for the high-speed interface.
PAGE 860
Page 860 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Table 268 Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments – RS-232-C interface (Part 2 of 2) Signal source Pin number Signal functions To DCE From DCE EIA circuit 17 Receiver signal element timing (DCE) — 3 DD 24 Transmitter signal element timing (DTE) 3 — DA Note: Pins not used are 9 to 14, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 25.
PAGE 861
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 861 of 906 Table 269 Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments – high-speed interface (Part 2 of 2) Signal source EIA circuit (lead) Signal functions To DCE From DCE Transmitter signal element timing (DTE) – lead B — 3 DD (B) 14 Transmitter signal element timing (DCE) – lead B — 3 DB (B) 15 Transmitter signal element timing (DCE) – lead A — 3 DB (A) 17 Transmitter signal element timing (DTE) – lead A — 3 DD (A) 23 Receiver signal element ti
PAGE 862
Page 862 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Configuring the ESDI card Configuring the ESDI card consists of setting the port addresses using the address selection switch and setting the port interface options using the jumper blocks. The system software must then be configured to recognize the ESDI card. Figure 185 on page 864 shows the location of all option switches and jumper sockets on the ESDI card.
PAGE 863
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 863 of 906 Table 270 ESDI card address switch settings (Part 2 of 2) Switch S2 style A Device Number Switch S2 style B Port 1 Port 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 12 13 off on on on on on off * 14 15 on on on on on on on * * Switch S2, position 4 is not used on style B cards. DTE/DCE mode jumper settings The interface for each ESDI port is configured independently.
PAGE 864
Page 864 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Figure 185 ESDI card option switch locations STYLE S1 S2 DS1 Address selection O1 23 4 N UA9 UB9 UA11 UA10 UB11 UB10 UA12 UB12 J1 Jumper plug installed in socket Port no. 1 jumpers UA17 UA16 UB17 UB16 UA19 UA18 UB19 UB18 J2 Empty jumper socket Port no. 2 jumpers Note: Ports 1 and 2 shown with jumper plugs installed for DCE and RS-232-C operation. 553-5983 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 865
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 865 of 906 Table 271 ESDI card DTE/DCE mode jumper settings Mode Port Jumper socket designations Data communication equipment (DTE) 1 UA10 UA12 Data terminal equipment (DCE) 1 UA9 UA11 Data communication equipment (DTE) 2 UA17 UA19 Data terminal equipment (DCE) 2 UA16 UA18 Table 272 ESDI card RS-232-C/high-speed interface jumper settings Mode Port Jumper socket designations RS-232-C interface 1 UB9 UB11 High-speed interface 1 UB
PAGE 866
Page 866 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card parameters. These parameters must be set for each ports if both ports are being used. LD 17 – Serial port configuration parameters. Prompt Response Description REQ: CHG Change configuration. TYPE: CFN Configuration type. IOTB YES Change input/output devices. ADAN NEW TTY x Define a new system terminal (printer) port as device x, where x = 0 to 15. NEW PRT x CDNO 1-16 Use the ESDI card number to keep track of all ports.
PAGE 867
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Page 867 of 906 Applications The QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card is used any time that a high-speed, fully synchronous serial data communication channel is needed. The ESDI card is typically used to connect to the following: • Meridian Mail • A host computer using Meridian Link • An auxiliary processor The system processor transfers data to the ESDI card in blocks consisting of 1 to 128 eight-bit octets.
PAGE 868
Page 868 of 906 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Figure 186 QPC513 ESDI card cabling I/O panel Backplane Filter adapters (Note 2) Card front panel Meridian Link Port 2 Cables to peripherals Meridian Mail Port 1 Q P C 5 1 3 J1 Module front J2 NT8D95 cables (Note 1) NT8D82 cables Note 1: : Note 2: This cable available in different lengths with various male/female connector combinations. Supplied with NT8D82 cable. 553-5984 553-3001-211 Standard 3.
PAGE 869
884 Page 869 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869 Physical description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872 Connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGE 870
Page 870 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card QSDI cards are housed in the following modules: • NT5D21 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 7) • NT6D39 CPU/Network module (slots 1 through 9, and 13) • NT6D60 Core module (slots 0 through 5) • NT8D35 Network module (slots 5 through 13) • NT9D11 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 8) Note: When a QSDI card is installed in an NT6D60 Core module, an NT8D34 CPU module, or slot 13 of an NT6D39 CPU/Network module in a dual-CPU system, any input
PAGE 871
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 871 of 906 Figure 187 QPC841 QSDI card front panel Card lock latch QPC841 LED QSDI ENB Enable/disable switch DIS J1 Port 1 connector (RS-232C) J2 Ports 2, 3, and 4 connector (non-standard) Card lock latch 553-5985 Circuit Card Description and Installation
PAGE 872
Page 872 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Functional description The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains all the logic for four asynchronous serial ports, including the baud rate generators. These serial ports are directly accessed by the system processor using memory reads and writes. The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains four universal asynchronous receiver/transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the UARTs to the system processor bus.
PAGE 873
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 873 of 906 Figure 188 QPC841 QSDI card block diagram RS-232-C drivers and receivers UARTs TD UART RD no. 1 UART Port 1 TD RD Port 2 TD RD Port 3 TD RD Port 4 J1 no. 2 UART J2 no. 3 UART no.
PAGE 874
Page 874 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Connector pin assignments Connector J1 is connected to port one, and uses the RS-232-C standard DB-25 pinout. Connector J2 is connected to ports two, three, and four, and is a non-standard pinout that requires an adapter cable. An adapter cable (NT8D96) splits the J2 signals out to three standard RS-232-C connectors. Port 2 is connected to connector A, Port 3 is connected to connector B, and Port 4 is connected to connector C.
PAGE 875
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 875 of 906 Table 274 Connector J2 pin assignments (Part 1 of 2) Pin Number Port Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode Frame ground Frame ground 1 FGD 2 TD Transmitted data Transmitted data 3 RD Received data Received data 4 RTS Request to send (not used) Request to send (Note 2) CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send 6 DSR Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready 7 GND Ground Ground 8 CD Carrier detect (Note 1) Carrier
PAGE 876
Page 876 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Table 274 Connector J2 pin assignments (Part 2 of 2) Pin Number Port Signal 19 GND 21 CD 22 DTR Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode Ground Ground Carrier detect (Note 1 Carrier detect (not used) Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2)) Note 1: In DTE mode, the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.
PAGE 877
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 877 of 906 select the addresses for ports 1 and 2. Switch SW15 is used to select the addresses for ports 3 and 4.
PAGE 878
Page 878 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Baud rate switch settings Table 276 lists the switch settings necessary to set the baud rate.
PAGE 879
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 879 of 906 DTE/DCE mode switch settings Table 277 shows the DTE/DCE mode selection switches for the four serial ports.
PAGE 880
Page 880 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 O 12 3 45 67 8 N Ports 1 and 2 O 12 34 56 7 8 N Ports 3 and 4 O 1 23 4 N Address selection SW6 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 J2 SW7 SW8 SW9 J1 SW1 DS1 Baud rate selection SW15 O 1 23 4 N SW14 SW13 O 1 2 34 N SW16 Port 1 O 12 34 N SW12 O 12 3 4 N SW11 SW10 Figure 189 QSDI card option switch locations O 1 23 45 6 N DCE DTE O 1 23 45 6 N DTE Port 1 DCE O 1 23 45 6 N DCE DTE O 1 23 45 6 N DTE Port 2 DTE /
PAGE 881
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Page 881 of 906 Software service changes Once the QPC841 QSDI card has been installed in the system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running the Configuration Record program are found in Software Input/Output: Administration (553-3001-311).
PAGE 882
Page 882 of 906 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Applications The QPD841 Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) card is used to connect the switch to a variety of communication devices and peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to any of the four serial ports. The standard application for the QSDI card is to connect the switch to the system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is located near the switch, or through a modem for remote maintenance.
PAGE 883
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card • Page 883 of 906 SDI multiple-port cable (internal system options use only) — NT8D90 • SDI I/O to DTE/DCE cables (system options use only) — NT8D95 Note: This cable is available in different lengths. Refer to Equipment Identification (553-3001-154) for more information • SID Multiple-port cable (system options use only) — NT8D96 Figure 190 shows the QPC841 card and the cables listed above in a standard configuration.
PAGE 884
Page 884 of 906 553-3001-211 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card Standard 3.
PAGE 885
900 Page 885 of 906 The TDS/DTR card Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886 Introduction The TDS/DTR card function was incorporated into the NTDK20 SSC. However, it is still supported on the system.
PAGE 886
Page 886 of 906 The TDS/DTR card Features Tone transmitter The TDS/DTR tone transmitter provides 30 channels of tone transmission. Up to 256 tones are available as u-Law or A-Law and up to 256 bursts and cadences are downloaded from the CPU. The TDS/DTR card does not provide the Music on Hold feature as do other TDS cards. The music source must come from a standard trunk card. Tone detector The TDS/DTR card provides eight channels of DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) detection in A-Law or µ-Law.
PAGE 887
The TDS/DTR card Page 887 of 906 Tones and cadences The following tables give the tones and cadences provided by the NTAK03 TDS/DTR card.
PAGE 888
Page 888 of 906 The TDS/DTR card Table 278 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-Law tones and cadence (Part 2 of 6) Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 19 770/1340 -12/-10 5 20 770/1480 -12/-10 6 21 850/1210 -12/-10 7 22 850/1340 -12/-10 8 23 850/1480 -12/-10 9 24 940/1340 -12/-10 0 25 940/1210 -12/-10 * 26 940/1480 -12/-10 # 27 700/1630 -12/-10 Fo 28 770/1630 -12/-10 F 29 850/1630 -12/-10 I 30 reserved 31 reserved 32 reserved 33 4
PAGE 889
The TDS/DTR card Page 889 of 906 Table 278 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-Law tones and cadence (Part 3 of 6) Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 39 770/1210 -17/-15 4 40 770/1340 -17/-15 5 41 770/1480 -17/-15 6 42 850/1210 -17/-15 7 43 850/1340 -17/-15 8 44 850/1480 -17/-15 9 45 940/1340 -17/-15 0 46 940/1210 -17/-15 * 47 940/1480 -17/-15 # 48 700/1630 -17/-15 Fo 49 770/1630 -17/-15 F 50 850/1630 -17/-15 I 51 reserved 52 res
PAGE 890
Page 890 of 906 The TDS/DTR card Table 278 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-Law tones and cadence (Part 4 of 6) Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 60 700/1500 -13/-13 7 61 900/1500 -13/-13 8 62 1100/1500 -13/-13 9 63 700/1700 -13/-13 ST3P/RB/ C11 64 900/1700 -13/-13 STP/C12 65 1100/1700 -13/-13 KP/CR/KP1 66 1300/1700 -13/-13 ST2P/KP2 67 1500/1700 -13/-13 ST/CC 68 400 -11 ÷ 69 400 -14 ÷ 70 400 x 50 -14 ÷ 71 (533 + 666) x 20 -23/-23
PAGE 891
The TDS/DTR card Page 891 of 906 Table 278 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-Law tones and cadence (Part 5 of 6) Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones 80 480 -19 ÷ 81 420 -9 ÷ 82 440 -29 ÷ 83 reserved 84 350/440 -17/-17 ÷ 85 400/450 -17/-17 ÷ 86 400 -17 ÷ 87 1400 -26 ÷ 88 950 -12 ÷ 89 1400 -12 ÷ 90 1800 -12 ÷ 91 470 0 ÷ 92 940 0 ÷ 93 1300 0 ÷ 94 1500 0 ÷ 95 1880 0 ÷ 96 350/440 -10/-10 97 TBD 98 TBD 99 TBD 100
PAGE 892
Page 892 of 906 The TDS/DTR card Table 278 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 µ-Law tones and cadence (Part 6 of 6) Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload Precision Ringing Tones 101 600 -19 ÷ 102 800 -19 ÷ 103 1400 -23 ÷ 104 820 -7 DTMF Digits MF Digits Note: Tones #1 - 16 (inclusive) and #234 - 249 (inclusive) are included for Norwegian and Malaysian specifications.
PAGE 893
The TDS/DTR card Page 893 of 906 Table 279 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 2 of 9) Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 12 940 X 1210 -14/-13 * 13 940 X 1480 -14/-13 # 14 700 X 1630 -14/-13 F0 15 770 X 1630 -14/-13 F 16 850 X 1630 -14/-13 I 17 1400 -37 89 940/1630 -13/-12 P 90 700/1210 -13/-12 1 91 700/1340 -13/-12 2 92 700/1480 -13/-12 3 93 770/1210 -13/-12 4 94 770/1340 -13/-12 5 95 770/1480 -13/-12
PAGE 894
Page 894 of 906 The TDS/DTR card Table 279 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 3 of 9) Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 104 850/1630 -13/-12 105 350/440 -17/-17 ÷ 106 400/450 -17/-17 ÷ 107 1400 -26 ÷ 108 440 -23 ÷ 109 420 -9 ÷ 110 950 -12 ÷ 111 1400 -12 ÷ 112 1800 -12 ÷ 113 940/1630 -12/-10 P 114 700/1210 -12/-10 1 115 700/1340 -12/-10 2 116 700/1480 -12/-10 3 117 770/1210 -12/-10 4 118 770/134
PAGE 895
The TDS/DTR card Page 895 of 906 Table 279 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 4 of 9) Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 125 940/1480 -12/-10 # 126 700/1630 -12/-10 F0 127 770/1630 -12/-10 F 128 850/1630 -12/-10 I 129 350/440 -22/-22 ÷ 130 400 -19 ÷ 131 400 -25 ÷ 132 400/450 -22/-22 ÷ 133 1400 -15 ÷ 134 950 -19 ÷ 135 1400 -20 ÷ 136 1800 -20 ÷ 137 420 -19 ÷ 138 940/1630 -18/-17 P 139 700/1210 -
PAGE 896
Page 896 of 906 The TDS/DTR card Table 279 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 5 of 9) Precision Ringing Tones DTMF Digits Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 146 850/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 8 147 850/1480 -18/-17 ÷ 9 148 940/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 0 149 940/1210 -18/-17 ÷ * 150 940/1480 -18/-17 ÷ # 151 700/1630 -18/-17 F0 152 770/1630 -18/-17 F 153 850/1630 -18/-17 I 154 (533 + 666) X 10 -23 ÷ 155 (533 + 666) X 20 -23 ÷ 156 400 -12 ÷ 157 820
PAGE 897
The TDS/DTR card Page 897 of 906 Table 279 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 6 of 9) Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload DTMF Digits 167 1700 -19 ÷ 168 440 -14 ÷ 169 380 -8 ÷ 170 1400 -32 ÷ 171 820 -7 P 172 850 -8 1 173 420 -32 2 174 reserved 175 420 -6 4 176 420 -2 5 177 1020 -13 6 178 1800 -17 7 179 1400 -23 8 180 950 -29 9 181 1400 -29 0 182 1800 -29 * 183 950 -22 # 184 470 0 F0
PAGE 898
Page 898 of 906 The TDS/DTR card Table 279 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 7 of 9) Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 188 420 X 25 -17 189 950 -16 190 950 -25 191 940/1630 -9/-7 192 700/1210 -9/-7 193 700/1340 -9/-7 194 700/1480 -9/-7 195 770/1210 -9/-7 196 770/1340 -9/-7 197 770/1480 -9/-7 198 850/1210 -9/-7 199 850/1340 -9/-7 200 850/1480 -9/-7 201 940/1340 -9/-7 202 940/1210 -9/-7 203 940/1480 -9/-7 204 700/1630 -9/-7
PAGE 899
The TDS/DTR card Page 899 of 906 Table 279 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 8 of 9) Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 209 420 -4 210 1400 -18 211 1400 -9 212 350/420 -9/-9 213 420 -14 214 450 -12 215 450 -22 216 820 -16 217 350/420 -14/-14 218 940/1630 -14/-12 219 700/1210 -14/-12 220 700/1340 -14/-12 221 700/1480 -14/-12 222 770/1210 -14/-12 223 770/1340 -14/-12 224 770/1480 -14/-12 225 850/1210 -14/-12 226 850/1340 -
PAGE 900
Page 900 of 906 The TDS/DTR card Table 279 NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences (Part 9 of 9) Precision Ringing Tones Tone # Frequency (Hz) dB below overload 230 940/1480 -14/-12 231 700/1630 -14/-12 232 770/1630 -14/-12 233 850/1630 -14/-12 234 940 X 1630 -17/-15 p 235 700 X 1210 -17/-15 1 236 700 X 1340 -17/-15 2 237 700 X 1480 -17/-15 3 238 770 X 1210 -17/-15 4 239 770 X 1340 -17/-15 5 240 770 X 1480 -17/-15 6 241 850 X 1210 -17/-15 7 553-3
PAGE 901
906 Page 901 of 906 Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Contents This section contains information on the following topics: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901 Frame structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902 LAPB balanced class of procedure . . . . . . . .
PAGE 902
Page 902 of 906 Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol LAPB subset of the HDLC protocol and transmitted serially to the line at a rate determined by the downloaded parameters. The QPC513 card receives data serially from the line, packaged in LAPB information frames. After determining that a block is error free the data is supplied to the Circuit Switch Equipment as a block. Frame structure All transmissions are in frames and each frame conforms to the format shown in Table 280 on page 903.
PAGE 903
Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Page 903 of 906 Table 280 LAPB frame structure Flag Address Control Information FCS Flag 01111110 8 bits 8 bits unspecified (no. of bits) 16 bits 01111110 Legend: Flag: Flag sequence – All frames start and end with the flag sequence. (A single flag is used as both the closing flag for one frame and the opening flag for the next frame.
PAGE 904
Page 904 of 906 Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Figure 191 Balanced configuration Commands Combined station Combined station Responses 553-3741 Asynchronous Balanced Mode Asynchronous Balanced Mode (ABM) is a balanced, configured operational mode in which either combined station may send commands at any time and may initiate certain response frame transmissions without receiving permission from the other combined station.
PAGE 905
Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Page 905 of 906 Table 281 Commands and responses Command Response I Option 8 RR RR RNR RNR REJ REJ or FRMR SABM UA DISC DM 2 Legend: I: Information RR: Receive ready RNR: Receive not ready REJ: Reject SABM: Set asynchronous balanced mode DISC: Disconnect RSET: Reset FRMR: Frame reject UA: Unnumbered acknowledge DM: Disconnect mode Option 2: Provides ability for more timely reporting of I frame sequence errors Option 8: Limits the procedure to allo
PAGE 906
Page 906 of 906 553-3001-211 Appendix A: LAPB Data Link Control protocol Standard 3.
PAGE 907
PAGE 908
Family Product Manual Contacts Copyright FCC notice Trademarks Document number Product release Document release Date Publish Nortel Communication Server 1000 Circuit Card Description and Installation Copyright © Nortel Networks Limited 2005 All Rights Reserved Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant.